US20070066585A1 - Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents - Google Patents
Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20070066585A1 US20070066585A1 US11/535,772 US53577206A US2007066585A1 US 20070066585 A1 US20070066585 A1 US 20070066585A1 US 53577206 A US53577206 A US 53577206A US 2007066585 A1 US2007066585 A1 US 2007066585A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- compound according
- hydrogen
- alkyl
- group
- heterocyclyl
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 0 *SC1=C([5*])C([4*])=C([3*])C([2*])=C1[1*] Chemical compound *SC1=C([5*])C([4*])=C([3*])C([2*])=C1[1*] 0.000 description 37
- PQNFLJBBNBOBRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1=CC=C2CCCC2=C1 Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CCCC2=C1 PQNFLJBBNBOBRQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NILUZSOSAYSMKX-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1CC2CCC(C1)N2.C1CC2CCC(C2)N1.C1CC2CCC1O2 Chemical compound C1CC2CCC(C1)N2.C1CC2CCC(C2)N1.C1CC2CCC1O2 NILUZSOSAYSMKX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- OFVHUALAYNDQRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC.CC(C)(C)C1=CC=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC.CC(C)(C)C1=CC=CC=C1 OFVHUALAYNDQRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NGTJWTJPUOXCKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1=CC=C2CCCC2=C1.CC.CC(C)(C)C Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CCCC2=C1.CC.CC(C)(C)C NGTJWTJPUOXCKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BVXBVMYTIQBMPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound CC(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 BVXBVMYTIQBMPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XIHFTDUKDIRRKY-HXUWFJFHSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC[C@@H]4CO)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC[C@@H]4CO)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 XIHFTDUKDIRRKY-HXUWFJFHSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KRGAECPDXVSJPY-NQIIRXRSSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4C[C@H](O)C[C@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4C[C@H](O)C[C@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 KRGAECPDXVSJPY-NQIIRXRSSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OLMNMKWZYAOBIK-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(NC(=O)OC(C)(C)C)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(NC(=O)OC(C)(C)C)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 OLMNMKWZYAOBIK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VDCWKOMRFTYIHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCN(C)C1=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C3)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=NC=N1 Chemical compound CCN(C)C1=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C3)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=NC=N1 VDCWKOMRFTYIHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RLTHAIWBVZSQOO-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(CO)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(CO)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 RLTHAIWBVZSQOO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HQRUSYULBHQARY-SJLPKXTDSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4C[C@H](O)C[C@@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4C[C@H](O)C[C@@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 HQRUSYULBHQARY-SJLPKXTDSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UTAAVKMLQCWSFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N O=C(O)C1CCCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 Chemical compound O=C(O)C1CCCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 UTAAVKMLQCWSFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JVFGBZRFEBWUBQ-VQIMIIECSA-N O=C(O)[C@H]1C[C@@H](O)CN1C1=NC=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=C1 Chemical compound O=C(O)[C@H]1C[C@@H](O)CN1C1=NC=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=C1 JVFGBZRFEBWUBQ-VQIMIIECSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HTOOSZYPDISCPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1=CC=C2C[Y]CC2=C1 Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C[Y]CC2=C1 HTOOSZYPDISCPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CBTNEIPGDHZPSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1=CC=C2C[Y]CC2=C1.CC.CC(C)(C)C Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C[Y]CC2=C1.CC.CC(C)(C)C CBTNEIPGDHZPSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GKPRCYONVSCBPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1CC2CC1CN2.C1CC2CCC(C1)N2.C1CC2CCC1O2 Chemical compound C1CC2CC1CN2.C1CC2CCC(C1)N2.C1CC2CCC1O2 GKPRCYONVSCBPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JWFBCYPUABGQNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N C=CCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound C=CCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 JWFBCYPUABGQNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DNGYDTICSAEIAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)C1=CC=C(SC2=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C2)C(C(F)(F)F)=C1.CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCOCC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(=O)C1=CC=C(SC2=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C2)C(C(F)(F)F)=C1.CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCOCC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 DNGYDTICSAEIAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HEPDEUPXTLVZBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)C1=CC=C(SC2=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C2)C(Cl)=C1Cl.CC(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(Cl)=C3Cl)=CS2)CC1 Chemical compound CC(=O)C1=CC=C(SC2=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C2)C(Cl)=C1Cl.CC(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(Cl)=C3Cl)=CS2)CC1 HEPDEUPXTLVZBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UOPLAJAFYJNCFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)N(C)C1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 Chemical compound CC(=O)N(C)C1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 UOPLAJAFYJNCFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VWDMVVKQHNPLEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)N(C)C1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 Chemical compound CC(=O)N(C)C1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 VWDMVVKQHNPLEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZFKSCQNGJJUYMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)N1CCCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound CC(=O)N1CCCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 ZFKSCQNGJJUYMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WGYZXTCUEIZSAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=CS2)CC1 Chemical compound CC(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=CS2)CC1 WGYZXTCUEIZSAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QSJHFUJBHHSDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound CC(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 QSJHFUJBHHSDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XGPHRJBZYZFMFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)NC1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)C1 Chemical compound CC(=O)NC1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)C1 XGPHRJBZYZFMFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZIHNRIDMLOHFPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)NC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 Chemical compound CC(=O)NC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 ZIHNRIDMLOHFPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JVJJYUVCAROHSN-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(=O)NC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 Chemical compound CC(=O)NC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 JVJJYUVCAROHSN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZIHNRIDMLOHFPP-OAQYLSRUSA-N CC(=O)N[C@@H]1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 Chemical compound CC(=O)N[C@@H]1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 ZIHNRIDMLOHFPP-OAQYLSRUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JVJJYUVCAROHSN-IBGZPJMESA-N CC(=O)N[C@H]1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 Chemical compound CC(=O)N[C@H]1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 JVJJYUVCAROHSN-IBGZPJMESA-N 0.000 description 1
- IZEYOZLYVTZYQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C(=O)CBr)C(Cl)=C2Cl)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C(=O)CBr)C(Cl)=C2Cl)C=CC=C1 IZEYOZLYVTZYQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CRWQFDKCKCNSPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C(=O)CBr)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C(=O)CBr)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 CRWQFDKCKCNSPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DZYDQYFUGOIWEU-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C(=O)CO)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C(=O)CO)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 DZYDQYFUGOIWEU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BHEGQCULFWMOJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(C(=O)O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(C(=O)O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 BHEGQCULFWMOJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KMZGVJHSOHMQRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(C(N)=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(C(N)=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 KMZGVJHSOHMQRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MPPICRKUKRZKSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(CCO)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(CCO)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 MPPICRKUKRZKSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ULOLQJYJZXDFCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(CO)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(CO)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 ULOLQJYJZXDFCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DPXJJPFYBPTJSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1.FC1=CC=C(C2=CC=NC=C2)C=C1C(F)(F)F Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1.FC1=CC=C(C2=CC=NC=C2)C=C1C(F)(F)F DPXJJPFYBPTJSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KQGLUKKEGLGGPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 KQGLUKKEGLGGPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SKCJPAKVOZQNSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCCC(C(=O)O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCCC(C(=O)O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 SKCJPAKVOZQNSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WMECQBYXSNEKHN-NRFANRHFSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC[C@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC[C@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 WMECQBYXSNEKHN-NRFANRHFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LAVKKMPTVSXQFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCN(CCCN(C)C)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCN(CCCN(C)C)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 LAVKKMPTVSXQFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QUGRAPNUWRECOX-IRLDBZIGSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CC[C@H](O)[C@H](C(=O)O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CC[C@H](O)[C@H](C(=O)O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 QUGRAPNUWRECOX-IRLDBZIGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KRGAECPDXVSJPY-WIYYLYMNSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4C[C@H](O)C[C@@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4C[C@H](O)C[C@@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 KRGAECPDXVSJPY-WIYYLYMNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JAALDEWGBMHNAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC=NC(Cl)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC=NC(Cl)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 JAALDEWGBMHNAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BPYDRKLCAZIWQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC=[N+]([O-])C=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC=[N+]([O-])C=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 BPYDRKLCAZIWQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LTKRVBROKLLUAI-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=COC(=O)N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=COC(=O)N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 LTKRVBROKLLUAI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BCKMDCAQOKRTLA-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=COC(N4CCCCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=COC(N4CCCCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 BCKMDCAQOKRTLA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JZBBIRZIXWYKLQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(N4CCCCC4)=N3)C(Cl)=C2Cl)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(N4CCCCC4)=N3)C(Cl)=C2Cl)C=CC=C1 JZBBIRZIXWYKLQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SUPMVKWAJPTUIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(N4CCCCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(N4CCCCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 SUPMVKWAJPTUIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WUNDXPOXWYYXFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(NCCCN4CCOCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(NCCCN4CCOCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 WUNDXPOXWYYXFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JEIBFHOERKUXPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(NCCN4CCCCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(NCCN4CCCCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 JEIBFHOERKUXPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VRRZPNMTWFUQEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(NCCN4CCOCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CSC(NCCN4CCOCC4)=N3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 VRRZPNMTWFUQEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HDEHZRHRHJEXOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(Cl)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(Cl)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 HDEHZRHRHJEXOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YYCCOHSORPUJOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N(C)C(C)C)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N(C)C(C)C)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 YYCCOHSORPUJOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UVMBLBJOESBFLX-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(C(N)=O)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(C(N)=O)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 UVMBLBJOESBFLX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MMSJGXADOJZECN-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(C5N=NNN5)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(C5N=NNN5)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 MMSJGXADOJZECN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OVVILUUFUJVIDC-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(CCO)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(CCO)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 OVVILUUFUJVIDC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZGLDFWBHYKIGKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(NCCCN5C=CN=C5)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(NCCCN5C=CN=C5)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 ZGLDFWBHYKIGKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JNPJONSHMIUCKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(O)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCC(O)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 JNPJONSHMIUCKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MPHIYSGHFVGRGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCCC(C(=O)O)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCCC(C(=O)O)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 MPHIYSGHFVGRGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LNXNIMOXVDAPMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCCC(C(N)=O)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCCC(C(N)=O)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 LNXNIMOXVDAPMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DWBUZUUUAVGYNE-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCCC(C5=NNNN5)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCCC(C5=NNNN5)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 DWBUZUUUAVGYNE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HSSYLIYWARWUTA-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCCC(CO)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCCC(CO)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 HSSYLIYWARWUTA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KFHOKZBDXDFZOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCN(C(=O)O)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCN(C(=O)O)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 KFHOKZBDXDFZOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DSFIFHBCIUBDGW-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCN(C5=NC=CC=C5)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CCN(C5=NC=CC=C5)CC4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 DSFIFHBCIUBDGW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VJRMETDTVGHPMG-QGZVFWFLSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CC[C@@H](O)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(N4CC[C@@H](O)C4)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 VJRMETDTVGHPMG-QGZVFWFLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZKSGNXMHHTXSLV-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(O)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=NC=NC(O)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 ZKSGNXMHHTXSLV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XXLJXHUHENVDCY-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC1CN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)CC(C)O1 Chemical compound CC1CN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)CC(C)O1 XXLJXHUHENVDCY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FDHIKTFGAVFLBW-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(OC)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound CCCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(OC)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 FDHIKTFGAVFLBW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TXMYNHMEJQOXEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound CCCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 TXMYNHMEJQOXEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ONGTUAKQYUOWAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCN(C(C)=O)C1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)C1 Chemical compound CCN(C(C)=O)C1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)C1 ONGTUAKQYUOWAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SLYGCFGQHBIXPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCN(CC)C(=O)C1CCCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)C1 Chemical compound CCN(CC)C(=O)C1CCCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)C1 SLYGCFGQHBIXPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KZNFSEHJBKKTTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCOC(=O)C1CCCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)C1 Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C1CCCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)C1 KZNFSEHJBKKTTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZDPCZVZIRBSJKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCOC(=O)C1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)CC1 Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)CC1 ZDPCZVZIRBSJKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FDHMDTHWFSTEQC-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCOC(=O)CC(=O)C1=CC=C(SC2=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C2)C(C(F)(F)F)=C1 Chemical compound CCOC(=O)CC(=O)C1=CC=C(SC2=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C2)C(C(F)(F)F)=C1 FDHMDTHWFSTEQC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GKTUFNINEUKFJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCOC(=O)CN1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)CC1 Chemical compound CCOC(=O)CN1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)CC1 GKTUFNINEUKFJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FRTCDBYRRZDOQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCOC(=O)N1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)CC1 Chemical compound CCOC(=O)N1CCN(C2=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=NC=N2)CC1 FRTCDBYRRZDOQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HEKPDFAHUMXMJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N CN(C)CCCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound CN(C)CCCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 HEKPDFAHUMXMJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CEEYZLMHLBHWRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(C(=O)O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(C(=O)O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 CEEYZLMHLBHWRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QMCLITAQOBPTQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(C(N)=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(C(N)=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 QMCLITAQOBPTQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VMYQJXMFOGNDIJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(CCO)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(CCO)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 VMYQJXMFOGNDIJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZBALKPBJFFDXAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(NC(C)=O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(NC(C)=O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 ZBALKPBJFFDXAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NCFNEGXOEYXVOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC(O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 NCFNEGXOEYXVOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BPJSFBIYRVIFEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCCC(C(=O)O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCCC(C(=O)O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 BPJSFBIYRVIFEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UTOZXJVSVDGVMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCCC(CO)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCCC(CO)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 UTOZXJVSVDGVMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FIOKSZYEWJPCQK-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCCN(C(C)=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCCN(C(C)=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 FIOKSZYEWJPCQK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WUFSAKWUUGHJKE-GOSISDBHSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC[C@@H]4CO)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC[C@@H]4CO)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 WUFSAKWUUGHJKE-GOSISDBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VHDWIPLMGLQQHO-SFHVURJKSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC[C@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCC[C@H]4C(=O)O)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 VHDWIPLMGLQQHO-SFHVURJKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ABFZFLPVUIIHIL-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCN(C(C)=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCN(C(C)=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 ABFZFLPVUIIHIL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SUZAUKCYSQZDMS-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCN(C=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCN(C=O)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 SUZAUKCYSQZDMS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MLUIWJJEIANOCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCN(CCCN(C)C)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CCN(CCCN(C)C)CC4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 MLUIWJJEIANOCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QEYRBFQHPLLGNP-UNTBIKODSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CC[C@@H](O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1.COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC=[N+]([O-])C=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CC[C@@H](O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1.COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC=[N+]([O-])C=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 QEYRBFQHPLLGNP-UNTBIKODSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZBALKPBJFFDXAB-IBGZPJMESA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CC[C@H](NC(C)=O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC(N4CC[C@H](NC(C)=O)C4)=NC=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 ZBALKPBJFFDXAB-IBGZPJMESA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZRTOZZSFRNWPJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC=NC(Cl)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 Chemical compound COC1=C(SC2=CC=C(C3=CC=NC(Cl)=C3)C=C2C(F)(F)F)C=CC=C1 ZRTOZZSFRNWPJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MDVVBJFUHZPIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N COCCCNC1=NC(C2=CC=C(SC3=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C3)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=CS1 Chemical compound COCCCNC1=NC(C2=CC=C(SC3=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C3)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=CS1 MDVVBJFUHZPIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SKJTVTNAJAPVAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N COCCNC1=NC(C2=CC=C(SC3=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C3)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=CS1 Chemical compound COCCNC1=NC(C2=CC=C(SC3=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C3)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=CS1 SKJTVTNAJAPVAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XXOBDTDQOADGQC-LJQANCHMSA-N COC[C@H]1CCCN1C1=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C3)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=NC=N1 Chemical compound COC[C@H]1CCCN1C1=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C3)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=NC=N1 XXOBDTDQOADGQC-LJQANCHMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KJSUQDXEKAJHLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N FC(F)(F)C1=CC(C2=CC=NC(Cl)=C2)=CC=C1SC1=CC2=C(C=C1)OCCO2 Chemical compound FC(F)(F)C1=CC(C2=CC=NC(Cl)=C2)=CC=C1SC1=CC2=C(C=C1)OCCO2 KJSUQDXEKAJHLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OJHMSKTUQAYMOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N NC(=O)C1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound NC(=O)C1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 OJHMSKTUQAYMOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GRRUUHVYLVKVPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N O=C(O)C1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound O=C(O)C1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 GRRUUHVYLVKVPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GERAUBTWBQPHRK-IBGZPJMESA-N O=C(O)[C@@H]1CCCN1C1=NC=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=C1 Chemical compound O=C(O)[C@@H]1CCCN1C1=NC=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=C1 GERAUBTWBQPHRK-IBGZPJMESA-N 0.000 description 1
- JVFGBZRFEBWUBQ-APWZRJJASA-N O=C(O)[C@@H]1C[C@@H](O)CN1C1=NC=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=C1 Chemical compound O=C(O)[C@@H]1C[C@@H](O)CN1C1=NC=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=C1 JVFGBZRFEBWUBQ-APWZRJJASA-N 0.000 description 1
- JYSZXOVIWSXAMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N OC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound OC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 JYSZXOVIWSXAMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RPAWCGDKHWOCGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N OCC1CCCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 Chemical compound OCC1CCCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 RPAWCGDKHWOCGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HYBFJADVMPQZEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N OCC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound OCC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 HYBFJADVMPQZEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZMYOKTHPJKLGOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N OCCC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound OCCC1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 ZMYOKTHPJKLGOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JSFBJVBUQSNAGD-UHFFFAOYSA-N OCCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound OCCN1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 JSFBJVBUQSNAGD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BYQWOSKTUPJKFV-GOSISDBHSA-N OC[C@H]1CCCN1C1=NC=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=C1 Chemical compound OC[C@H]1CCCN1C1=NC=CC(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)=C1 BYQWOSKTUPJKFV-GOSISDBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OZDIXXYNNZCRMU-QGZVFWFLSA-N O[C@@H]1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 Chemical compound O[C@@H]1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=CC5=C(C=C4)OCCO5)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)C1 OZDIXXYNNZCRMU-QGZVFWFLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HKQSYXSKLFYXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N [H]C(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 Chemical compound [H]C(=O)N1CCN(C2=NC=CC(C3=CC=C(SC4=C(C(C)C)C=CC=C4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C3)=C2)CC1 HKQSYXSKLFYXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VHCIQSVDYSVJQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N [O-][N+]1=CC=C(C2=CC=C(F)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)C=C1 Chemical compound [O-][N+]1=CC=C(C2=CC=C(F)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)C=C1 VHCIQSVDYSVJQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DHHDOEGHPGLRTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N [O-][N+]1=CC=C(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)C=C1 Chemical compound [O-][N+]1=CC=C(C2=CC=C(SC3=CC4=C(C=C3)OCCO4)C(C(F)(F)F)=C2)C=C1 DHHDOEGHPGLRTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D239/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
- C07D239/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
- C07D239/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
- C07D239/28—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
- C07D239/32—One oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom
- C07D239/42—One nitrogen atom
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
- A61P35/04—Antineoplastic agents specific for metastasis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
- A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
- A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
- A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
- A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D263/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings
- C07D263/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings
- C07D263/30—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
- C07D263/34—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
- C07D263/48—Nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D277/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
- C07D277/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
- C07D277/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
- C07D277/32—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
- C07D277/38—Nitrogen atoms
- C07D277/42—Amino or imino radicals substituted by hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
- C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
- C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
- C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
- C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
- C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
- C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
- C07D403/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
Definitions
- the present invention relates to compounds that are useful for treating inflammatory and immune diseases, to pharmaceutical compositions comprising these compounds, and to methods of inhibiting inflammation or suppressing immune response in a mammal.
- Inflammation results from a cascade of events that includes vasodilation accompanied by increased vascular permeability and exudation of fluid and plasma proteins. This disruption of vascular integrity precedes or coincides with an infiltration of inflammatory cells.
- Infammatory mediators generated at the site of the initial lesion serve to recruit inflammatory cells to the site of the injury. These mediators (chemokines such as IL-8, MCP-1, MIP-1, and RANTES, complement fragments and lipid mediators) have chematactic activity for leukocytes and attract the inflammatory cells to the inflamed lesion.
- chemokines chemokines such as IL-8, MCP-1, MIP-1, and RANTES, complement fragments and lipid mediators
- chemotactic mediators which cause circulating leukocytes to localize at the site of inflammation require the cells to cross the vascular endothelium at a precise location. This leukocyte recruitment is accomplished by a process called cell adhesion.
- the first step consists of leukocytes rolling along the vascular endothelial cell lining in the region of inflammation.
- the rolling step is mediated by an interaction between a leukocyte surface oligosaccharide, such as Sialylated Lewis-X antigen (SLe x ), and a selectin molecule expressed on the surface of the endothelial cell in the region of inflammation.
- a leukocyte surface oligosaccharide such as Sialylated Lewis-X antigen (SLe x )
- SLe x Sialylated Lewis-X antigen
- the selectin molecule is not normally expressed on the surface of endothelial cells but rather is induced by the action of inflammatory mediators such as TNF- ⁇ and interleukin-1. Rolling decreases the velocity of the circulating leukocyte in the region of inflammation and allows the cells to more firmly adhere to the endothelial cell. The firm adhesion is accomplished by the interaction of integrin molecules that are present on the surface of the rolling leukocytes and their counter-receptors (the Ig superfamily molecules) on the surface of the endothelial cell.
- the Ig superfamily molecules or CAMs Cell Adhesion Molecules
- Cell Adhesion Molecules are either not expressed or are expressed at low levels on normal vascular endothelial cells.
- the CAM's like the selecting, are induced by the action of inflammatory mediators like TNF-alpha and IL-1.
- the final event in the adhesion process is the extravasation of leukocytes through the endothelial cell barrier and their migration along a chemotactic gradient to the site of inflammation. This transmigration is mediated by the conversion of the leukocyte integrin from a low avidity state to a high avidity state.
- the adhesion process relies on the induced expression of selectins and CAM's on the surface of vascular endothelial cells to mediate the rolling and firm adhesion of leukocytes to the vascular endothelium.
- ICAM-1 intercellular adhesion molecule
- the present invention discloses compounds which bind to the interaction-domain (I-domain) of LFA-1, thus interrupting endothelial cell-leukocyte adhesion by blocking the interaction of LFA-1 with ICAM-1, ICAM-3, and other adhesion molecules. These compounds are useful for the treatment or prophylaxis of diseases in which leukocyte trafficking plays a role, notably acute and chronic inflammatory diseases, autoimmune diseases, tumor metastasis, allograft rejection, and reperfusion injury.
- R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, cyano, nitro, cycloalkyl and carboxaldehyde;
- Presently preferred compounds of Formula I have R 3 as Formula II (shown above), with substituents defined as above, R 1 and R 2 each independently as hydrogen, halogen, haloalkyl or nitro; and R 4 and R 5 each independently as hydrogen or alkyl.
- the present invention is also directed to compounds of the structure
- Presently most preferred compounds of Formula III have p as one; R 4 and R 5 as hydrogen; R 12 as halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl or heterocyclyl; and R 10 and R 11 joined to form a three to seven membered heterocyclyl ring; said ring being piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine or azetidine.
- the compounds represented by structural Formula 1, above may be prepared by synthetic processes or by metabolic processes Processes for the preparation of the compounds of the present invention by metabolic processes include those occurring in the human or animal body (in vivo) or by processes occurring in vitro.
- the present invention is also directed to a method of treatment or prophylaxis in which the inhibition of inflammation or suppression of immune response is desired, comprising administering an effective amount of a compound having Formula I.
- compositions containing compounds of Formula I are disclosed.
- alkanoyl refers to an alkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- alkanoylamino refers to an alkanoyl group attached to the parent molecular group though an amino group.
- alkanoylaminoalkyl refers to an alkanoylamino group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- alkanoyloxy refers to an alkanoyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an oxygen radical.
- alkanoyloxyalkyl refers to an alkanoyloxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- alkoxy refers to an alkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an oxygen atom.
- alkoxyalkoxy refers to an alkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkoxy group.
- alkoxyalkyl refers to an alkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- alkoxycarbonyl refers to an alkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- alkoxycarbonylalkyl refers to an alkoxycarbonyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- alkyl refers to a saturated straight or branched chain group of 1-10 carbon atoms derived from an alkane by the removal of one hydrogen atom.
- alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl)amino refers to an amino group substituted with one alkyl group and one alkoxycarbonylalkyl group.
- alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl)aminoalkyl refers to an alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl)amino group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- alkylene refers to a divalent group of 1-10 carbon atoms derived from a straight or branched chain alkane by the removal of two hydrogen atoms.
- alkylsulfonyl refers to an alkyl radical attached to the parent molecular group through an —SO 2 — group.
- alkylsulfonylaminocarbonyl refers to an alkylsulfonyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an aminocarbonyl group.
- amino refers to a radical of the form —NR a R b , or to a radical of the form —NR a —, where R a and R b are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl or cycloalkyl.
- aminoalkanoyl refers to an amino group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkanoyl group.
- aminoalkyl refers to an amino group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- aminocarbonyl refers to an amino group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- aryl refers to a mono- or bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings.
- the aryl group can also be fused to a cyclohexane, cyclohexene, cyclopentane or cyclopentene ring.
- the aryl groups of this invention can be optionally substituted with alkyl, halogen, hydroxy, or alkoxy substituents.
- arylalkoxy refers to an aryl group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkoxy group.
- arylalkoxycarbonyl refers to an arylalkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- arylsulfonyl refers to an aryl radical attached to the parent molecular group through an —SO 2 — group.
- arylsulfonylaminocarbonyl refers to an arylsulfonyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an aminocarbonyl group.
- carboxydehyde refers to the radical —CHO.
- carboxydehyde hydrazone refers to the radical —CH ⁇ N—NR c R d , where R c and R d are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl or cycloalkyl.
- carboxylate or “carboxamido” as used herein refer to an amino group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- carboxamidoalkyl refers to a carboxamido group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- carboxyalkyl refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- carboxyalkylamino refers to a carboxyalkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an amino group.
- carboxyalkoxy refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkoxy group.
- carboxycarbonyl refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- carboxycycloalkoxy refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a cycloalkoxy group.
- carboxythioalkoxy refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a thioalkoxy group.
- cyano refers to the radical —CN.
- cycloalkyl refers to a monovalent saturated cyclic or bicyclic hydrocarbon group of 3-12 carbons derived from a cycloalkane by the removal of a single hydrogen atom. Cycloalkyl groups may be optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or hydroxy substituents.
- cycloalkoxy refers to a monovalent saturated cyclic or bicyclic hydrocarbon group of 3-12 carbons derived from a cycloalkane by the removal of a single hydrogen atom, linked to the parent molecular group through an oxygen atom. Cycloalkoxy groups may be optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, halo or hydroxy groups.
- halo or halogen as used herein refers to F, Cl, Br, or I.
- haloalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with one or more halogen atoms.
- heterocycle or “heterocyclyl” represent a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered ring containing one, two or three heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
- the 4- and 5-membered rings have zero to two double bonds and the 6- and 7-membered rings have zero to three double bonds.
- heterocycle or “heterocyclic” as used herein additionally refers to bicyclic, tricyclic and tetracyclic groups in which any of the above heterocyclic rings is fused to one or two rings independently selected from an aryl ring, a cyclobexane ring, a cyclohexene ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cyclopentene ring or another monocyclic heterocyclic ring.
- Heterocycles include acridinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuryl, benzothiazolyl, benzothienyl, benzoxazolyl, biotinyl, cinnolinyl, dihydrofuryl, dihydroindolyl, dihydropyranyl, dihydrothienyl, dithiazolyl, furyl, homopiperidinyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, isoquinolyl, isothiazolidinyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolidinyl, isoxazolyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl, oxazolidinyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, pyranyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrid
- Heterocyclics also include bridged bicyclic groups where a monocyclic heterocyclic group is bridged by an alkylene group such as and the like.
- Heterocyclics also include compounds of the formula where X* and Z* are independently selected from —CH 2 —, —CH 2 NH—, —CH 2 O—, —NH— and —O—, with the proviso that at least one of X* and Z* is not —CH 2 —, and Y* is selected from —C(O)— and —(C(R′′) 2 ) v —, where R′′ is hydrogen or alkyl of one to four carbons, and v is 1-3.
- These heterocycles include 1,3-benzodioxolyl, 1,4-benzodioxanyl, 1,3-benzimidazol-2-one and the like.
- the heterocycle groups of this invention can be optionally substituted with alkyl, halogen, hydroxy or alkoxy substituents.
- heterocyclylalkyl refers to a heterocyclic group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- heterocyclylalkylamino refers to an heterocyclylalkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an amino group.
- heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl refers to a heterocyclylalkylamino group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- heterocyclylamino refers to a heterocyclyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an amino group.
- heterocyclylcarbonyl refers to a heterocyclyl group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- heterocyclylsulfonyl refers to a heterocyclyl radical attached to the parent molecular group through an —SO 2 — group.
- heterocyclylsulfonylaminocarbonyl refers to a heterocyclylsulfonyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an aminocarbonyl group.
- hydroxyalkanoyl refers to a hydroxy radical attached to the parent molecular group through an alkanoyl group.
- hydroxyalkoxy refers to a hydroxy radical attached to the parent molecular group through an alkoxy group.
- hydroxyalkoxyalkyl refers to a hydroxyalkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- hydroxyalkyl refers to a hydroxy radical attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- hydroxyalkylaminocarbonyl refers to a hydroxyalkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an aminocarbonyl group.
- perfluoroalkyl refers to an alkyl group in which all of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by fluoride atoms.
- phenyl refers to a monocyclic carbocyclic ring system having one aromatic ring.
- the phenyl group can also be fused to a cyclohexane or cyclopentane ring.
- the phenyl groups of this invention can be optionally substituted with alkyl, halogen, hydroxy or alkoxy substituents.
- prodrugs as used herein represents those prodrugs of the compounds of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the invention.
- prodrug represents compounds which are rapidly transformed in vivo to the parent compound of the above formula, for example, by hydrolysis in blood.
- hydrolysis in blood A thorough discussion is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Edward B. Roche, ed., Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- sulfonate refers to the radical —SO 3 H.
- tetrazole or “tetrazolyl” as used herein refers to the heterocyclic radical —CN 4 H.
- thioalkoxy refers to an alkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through a sulfur atom.
- trans-cinnamyl refers to an acrylamido group (aminocarbonylethenyl) attached to the parent molecular group through C-3 of the acrylamido group, such that the aminocarbonyl and the parent molecular group exist in a trans relationship about the ethenyl group.
- lower refers to a C 1 -C 6 unit for a particular functionality.
- lower alkyl means C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
- substitution may be by one or more groups such as alcohols, ethers, esters, amides, sulfones, sulfides, hydroxyl, nitro, cyano, carboxy, amines, heteroatoms, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxyalkoxy, acyloxy, halogen, trifluoromethoxy, trifluoromethyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, alkylheterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, oxo, arylsulfonaminocarbonyl or any of the substituents of the preceding paragraphs or any of those substituents either attached directly or by suitable linkers.
- groups such as alcohols, ethers, esters, amides, sulfones, s
- the linkers are typically short chains of 1-3 atoms containing any combination of —C—, —C(O)—, —NH—, —S—, —S(O)—, —O—, —C(O)O— or —S(O)—. Rings may be substituted multiple times.
- electrostatically-withdrawing or “electron-donating” refer to the ability of a substituent to withdraw or donate electrons relative to that of hydrogen if hydrogen occupied the same position in the molecule. These terms are well-understood by one skilled in the art and are discussed in Advanced Organic Chemistry by J. March, 1985, pp. 16-18, incorporated herein by reference.
- Electron withdrawing groups include halo, nitro, carboxyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, carboxaldehyde, carboxyamido, aryl, quaternary ammonium and trifluoromethyl among others.
- Electron donating groups include such groups as hydroxy, lower alkyl, amino, lower alkylamino, di(lower alkyl)amino, aryloxy, mercapto, lower alkylthio, lower alkylmercapto and disulfide among others.
- substituents may have electron donating or electron withdrawing properties under different chemical conditions.
- the present invention contemplates any combination of substituents selected from the above-identified groups.
- the most preferred electron donating or electron withdrawing substituents are halo, nitro, alkanoyl, carboxaldehyde, arylalkanoyl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxamide, cyano, sulfonyl, sulfoxide, heterocyclyl, guanidine, quaternary ammonium, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, sulfonium salts, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkyl, amino, lower alkylamino, di(lower alkylamino), amine lower mercapto, mercaptoalkyl, alkylthio and alkyldithio.
- composition is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from a combination of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts.
- Stereoisomers include enantiomers and diastereomers, and mixtures of enantiomers or diastereomers are designated ( ⁇ ).
- Individual stereoisomers of compounds of the present invention can be prepared synthetically from commercially available starting materials which contain asymmetric or chiral centers or by preparation of racemic mixtures followed by resolution well-known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
- Geometric isomers can also exist in the compounds of the present invention.
- the present invention contemplates the various geometric isomers and mixtures thereof resulting from the arrangement of substituents around a carbon-carbon double bond or arrangement of substituents around a carbocyclic ring.
- Substituents around a carbon-carbon double bond are designated as being in the Z or E configuration wherein the term “Z” represents substituents on the same side of the carbon-carbon double bond and the term “E” represents substituents on opposite sides of the carbon-carbon double bond.
- Compounds of the present invention include, but are not limited to: 1-(6-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrimidin-4-yl)-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid, 4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-6-(3-(2H-tretrazol-5-yl)-piperidin-1-yl)-pyrimidine, 4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-6-(4-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-piperidin-1-yl)-pyrimidine, (1-(6-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrimidin-4-yl)-piperidin-3-y
- DCM for methylene dichloride
- EWG electron withdrawing group
- NMP for N-methylpyrrolidinone
- sat. for saturated
- THF for tetrahydrofuran
- TFA for trifluoroacetic acid
- BINAP for 2,2′-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1,1′-binaphthyl
- DMSO for dimethylsulfoxide
- MCPBA meta-chloroperbenzoic acid
- DMF for dimethylformamide
- TLC for thin layer chromatography
- HPLC for high pressure liquid chromatography
- APCI for atmospheric pressure chemical ionization
- ESI electrospray ionization
- DCI for direct chemical ionization
- LFA for lymphocyte function-associated antigen
- ICAM intercellular adhesion molecule.
- the present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions which comprise compounds of the present invention formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers.
- the pharmaceutical compositions may be specially formulated for oral administration in solid or liquid form, for parenteral injection, or for rectal administration.
- compositions of this invention can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracisternally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), bucally, or as an oral or nasal spray.
- parenteral administration refers to modes of administration which include intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrasternal, subcutaneous and intraarticular injection and infusion.
- compositions of this invention for parenteral injection comprise pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions as well as sterile powders for reconstitution into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use.
- suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers, diluents, solvents or vehicles include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil), and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
- Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
- compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservative, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like, Prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
- adjuvants such as preservative, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, and dispersing agents.
- the absorption of the drug in order to prolong the effect of the drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
- Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the drug in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio of drug to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissues.
- the injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium just prior to use.
- Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules.
- the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or (a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, (b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidone, sucrose, and acacia, (c) humectants such as glycerol, (d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, (e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, (f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, (g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and
- the dosage form may also comprise buffering agents.
- Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
- the solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
- the active compounds can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-mentioned excipients.
- Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically-acceptable emulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
- the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethyl formamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
- inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifier
- the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
- adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
- Suspensions in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar, and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
- suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar, and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
- compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at room temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
- suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at room temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
- Liposomes are generally derived from phospholipids or other lipid substances. Liposomes are formed by mono- or multi-lamellar hydrated liquid crystals that are dispersed in an aqueous medium. Any non-toxic, physiologically-acceptable and metabolizable lipid capable of forming liposomes can be used.
- the present compositions in liposome form can contain, in addition to a compound of the present invention, stabilizers, preservatives, excipients, and the like.
- the preferred lipids are the phospholipids and the phosphatidyl cholines (lecithins), both natural and synthetic.
- the compounds of the present invention may be used in the form of pharmaceutically-acceptable salts derived from inorganic or organic acids.
- pharmaceutically-acceptable salt is meant those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
- Pharmaceutically-acceptable salts are well-known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describe pharmaceutically-acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66: 1 et seq.
- the salts may be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention or separately by reacting a free base function with a suitable acid.
- Representative acid addition salts include, but are not limited to acetate, adipate, alginate, citrate, aspartate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, bisulfate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, digluconate, glycerophosphate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, fumarate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate (isethionate), lactate, maleate, methanesulfonate, nicotinate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, oxalate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, succinate,
- the basic nitrogen-containing groups can be quaternized with such agents as lower alkyl halides such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides; dialkyl sulfates like dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl and diamyl sulfates; long chain halides such as decyl, lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides; arylalkyl halides like benzyl and phenethyl bromides and others. Water or oil-soluble or dispersible products are thereby obtained.
- lower alkyl halides such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides
- dialkyl sulfates like dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl and diamyl sulfates
- long chain halides such as decyl
- Basic addition salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of compounds of this invention by reacting a carboxylic acid-containing moiety with a suitable base such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically acceptable metal cation or with ammonia or an organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine.
- a suitable base such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically acceptable metal cation or with ammonia or an organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine.
- Pharmaceutically-acceptable basic addition salts include, but are not limited to, cations based on alkali metals or alkaline earth metals such as lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium and aluminum salts and the like and nontoxic quaternary ammonia and amine cations including ammonium, tetramethylammonium, tetraethylammonium, methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, triethylamine, diethylamine, ethylamine and the like.
- Other representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperidine, piperazine and the like.
- Dosage forms for topical administration of a compound of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments and inhalants.
- the active compound is mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
- Opthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders and solutions are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
- Actual dosage levels of active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active compound(s) that is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, compositions, and mode of administration.
- the selected dosage level will depend upon the activity of the particular compound, the route of administration, the severity of the condition being treated, and the condition and prior medical history of the patient being treated. However, it is within the skill of the art to start doses of the compound at levels lower than required for to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and to gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved.
- dosage levels of about 0.1 to about 50 mg, more preferably of about 5 to about 20 mg of active compound per kilogram of body weight per day are administered orally or intravenously to a mammalian patient.
- the effective daily dose may be divided into multiple doses for purposes of administration, e.g. two to four separate doses per day.
- Aryl methyl ketone 1 with the approprite substitutions and a leaving group X reacts with an aryl thiol to give biaryl sulfide 2.
- Biarylsulfide can be converted into alpha-bromomethyl ketone 3 using a variety of reagents including Bu 4 NBr 3 . Condensation of 3 with a urea then gives the desired compounds 4.
- the biaryl sulfide alpha-bromomethyl ketone 3 can be prepared following the procedure outline in Scheme 1. Condensation of 3 with a properly substituted thiourea gives the desired 2-aminothioazole 10.
- Scheme 4 describes one procedure for the preparation of this class of compounds. Reaction of biaryl sulfide methyl ketone 2 with diethyl carbonate under base-catalysis leads to beta-ketoester 11. Condensation of 11 with formamidine gives 4-hydroxy pyrimidine 12, which can be converted into 4-chloropyrimidine 13. Displacement of the chloride of 13 by amines then gives the desired 4-amino-pyrimidine 14.
- Scheme 6 describes one procedure for the preparation of this class of compounds.
- Pd-catalyzed cross-coupling of properly substituted 1-bromo-4-fluoro-benzene 15 and 4-pyridine boronic acid gives compounds 18.
- Oxidation of 18 with MCPBA leads to pyridinium oxide 19.
- Displacement of the fluoride of 19 with aryl thiols then affords biarylsulfide 20.
- Treatment of 20 with POCl 3 leads to 2-chloropyridine 21.
- reaction of 21 with selected amines gives the desired 2-aminopyridines 22.
- 1-(4-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone 24 was prepared as follows. To a solution of o-isopropyl thiophenol (2.46 ml, 15 mmole) and 4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl acetophenone (3.0 g, 14.6 mmole) in 100 ml of DMF was added Cs 2 CO 3 (7.15 g, 22 mmole). After stirring for 3 hours, the mixture was filtered and solvent was removed by evaporation.
- 1-(4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-2-hydroxy-ethanone 27 was prepared as follows. To a solution of 1-fluoro-3-trifluoroacetophenone (1.0 g, 5.0 mmole) in acetonitrile (15 ml) and water (3 ml) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.77 ml, 10 mmole) and bis-(trifluoroacetoxyl)iodobenzene (4.3 g, 10 mmole). The mixture was refluxed for three hours. The solution was concentrated and then extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 30 ml). The combined organic solution was washed with 5% aq. NaHCO 3 and dried.
- 2-hydroxy-1-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone 28 was prepared as follows. To a solution of compound 27 (0.4 g, 1.8 mmole) and o-isopropylthiophenol (0.31 ml, 1.8 mmole) in DMF (10 ml) was added Cs 2 CO 3 (0.59 g, 1.8 mmole). The mixture was stirred for 10 minutes and EtOAc (30 ml) was added. The mixture was filtered, concentrated and chromatographed on a silica gel column eluting with 30% EtOAc in hexane.
- 4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-3H-oxaxol-2-one 29 was prepared as follows. To a solution of compound 28 (0.22 g, 0.62 mmole) and potassium cyanate 0.25 g, 3.0 mmole) in DMF 5.0 ml) was added 0.5 ml of 4 M HCl in dioxane. The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 hours and another 0.25 ml of 4 M HCl in dioxane was added. The mixture was stirred for another 10 minutes and then quenched with water (20 ml). The layers were separated and the organic layer was extracted with EtOAc.
- 2-chloro-4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-oxazole 30 was prepared as follows. A solution of compound 29 (197 mg, 0.52 mmole) and diethylphenylamine (0.085 ml) in phosphorus oxychloride (5.0 ml) was refluxed for two hours. The mixture was then concentrated and the residue was quenched with ice-water, followed by extraction with EtOAc. The EtOAc solution was dried, filtered and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed on a 10-g silica gel cartridge, eluting with 30% EtOAc in hexane.
- Furan-2-ylmethyl-(4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-amine 38 was synthesized according to the following procedure
- 1-(2,3-dichloro-4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)phenyl)ethanene 40 was prepared as follows. To a solution of o-isopropyl thiophenol (3.14 g, 25 mmole) and 2,3,4-trichloro-acetophenone (5.9 g, 25 mmole) in DMF (100 ml) was added Na 2 CO 3 (2.65 g, 25 mmole). The reaction was quenched with water (300 ml) after stirring for 50 hours at ambient temperature. The solution was extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 100 ml). The combined EtOAc solution was dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered and concentrated.
- 2-bromo-1-(2,3-dichloro-4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-phenyl)-ethanone 41 was prepared as follows. A solution of Br 2 (50 mg) in dioxane (1.0 ml) was added to a solution of compound 40 (100 mg, 0.3 mmole) in 2 ml of dioxane. The solution was then stirred for another 10 minutes and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc and purified on a 5-g silica gel cartridge, giving the desired product 41 as a white solid. 136 mg, ⁇ 100%.
- 1-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone 44 was prepared as follows. To a solution of 4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-acetophenone (7.00 g, 34.0 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) was added 2-isopropylthiophenol (6.33 g, 37.4 mmol) followed by cesium carbonate (16.6 g, 51.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was partitioned between ethyl acetate (250 mL) and water (250 mL).
- 3-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-3-oxo-propionic acid ethyl ester 45 was prepared as follows. To a solution of compound 44 (11.5 g, 34.0 mmol) in THF (150 mL) was added 60% sodium hydride in mineral oil (1.84 g, 40.8 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 minutes. Diethyl carbonate (46.5 mL, 340 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated under reflux for 2 hours. 10% HCl aq. (100 mL) was added and the solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL).
- 6-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrimidin-4-ol 46 was prepared as follows. The mixture of compound 45 (10.6 g, 25.8 mmol) and formamidine hydrochloride (10.4 g, 129 mmol) in 20% HOAc in DMF (50 mL) was heated at 120° C. for 3 days. MeOH (50 mL) was added and the resulting solution was purified on a preparative HPLC column, C 8 reverse-phase column, eluted with NH 4 OAc—H 2 O—CH 3 CN. Evaporation of solvents gave a white solid 46 (1.40 g, 14%); MS (APCI) m/z 391 (M+H) + .
- N-Ethyl-N-1-(6-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrimidin-4-yl)-pyrrolidin-3-yl)-acetamide 52 was synthesized according to the following procedure
- 4-(4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine 73 was prepared as follows. To a suspension of pyridine-4-boronic acid (2.59 g, 21.1 mmol) in 1-propanol (60 mL) was added 5-bromo-2-fluorobenzotrifluoride (5.12 g, 21.1 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (0.160 g, 0.610 mmol), followed by sodium carbonate in water (2.0 M, 12 mL). The mixture was purged with nitrogen gas for 10 minutes. To it was added palladium(II) acetate (0.044 g, 0.196 mmol) and it was then heated under reflux for 4 hours.
- reaction mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (200 mL) and water (200 mL). The organic layer was separated, washed with brine (3 ⁇ 200 mL), dried over MgSO 4 , then filtered. After evaporating the solvent, the crude material was loaded to a silica gel column, eluting with 60% ethyl acetate in hexane to give a white solid 73 (2.73 g, 54%).
- 4-(4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine-1-oxide 74 was prepared as follows. To a solution of compound 73 (2.49 g, 10.3 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was added methyltrioxorhenium(VII) (0.128 g, 0.515 mmol), followed by hydrogen peroxide in water (30%, 5.15 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. Manganese (IV) oxide (0.050 g) was added. The mixture was stirred for another 30 minutes. The organic layer was separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with more dichloromethane (2 ⁇ 10 mL).
- 4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine-1-oxide 75 was prepared as follows. A solution of compound 74 (2.51g, 9.76 mmol) in dimethylacetamide (100 mL) was purged with nitrogen gas for 10 minutes. To it was added cesium carbonate (3.80 g, 11.7 mmol), followed by 2-isopropylthiophenol (4.90 mL, 29.3 mmol). The reaction was heated at 100° C. for 16 hours. The mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (200 mL) and water (200 mL).
- 2-chloro-4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine 76 was prepared as follows. Compound 75 (3.19 g, 8.19 mmol) was treated with POCl 3 (50 mL) at 100° C. for 10 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotovap, and the residue was treated with crushed ice (20 g). Water (100 mL) was added, the aqueous solution was then extracted with ethyl acetate (2 ⁇ 100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (3 ⁇ 100 mL), dried over MgSO 4 , filtered and concentrated.
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (R)-2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 97 was obtained (0.0233 g, 51%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-hydroxypiperidine. A yellow solid 98 was obtained (0.0299 g, 66%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-formylpiperazine. A yellow solid 99 was obtained (0.0159 g, 34%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (D)-proline. A yellow solid 100 was obtained (0.0366 g, 78%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-piperidinemethanol. A yellow solid 101 was obtained (0.0299 g, 64%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (3R)-(+)-3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 102 was obtained (0.0391 g, 81%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 103 was obtained (0.0306 g, 64%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-acetylpiperazine. A yellow solid 104 was obtained (0.0197 g, 41%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotamide. A yellow solid 105 was obtained (0.0272 g, 57%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotic acid. A yellow solid 106 was obtained (0.0225 g, 47%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with nipecotic acid. A yellow solid 107 was obtained (0.0283 g, 59%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-(2′-hydroxyethyl)piperidine. A yellow solid 108 was obtained (0.0308 g, 64%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-(N-acetyl-N-methylamino)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 111 was obtained (0.0211 g, 43%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with N-acetylhomopiperazine. A yellow solid 112 was obtained (0.0246 g, 50%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with I-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)piperazine. A yellow solid 113 was obtained (0.0414 g, 79%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-propylpiperazine. A yellow solid 114 was obtained (0.033 g, 69%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-hydroxymethyl piperidine. A yellow solid 115 was obtained (0.0279 g, 60%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-hydroxypiperidine. A yellow solid 119 was obtained (0.031 g, 63%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (R)-2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 120 was obtained (0.027 g, 55%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-piperidinemethanol. A yellow solid 122 was obtained (0.0284 g, 57%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (3R)-(+)-3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 123 was obtained (0.0397 g, 78%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 124 was obtained (0.0369 g, 72%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-acetylpiperazine. A yellow solid 125 was obtained (0.010 g, 19%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotamide. A yellow solid 126 was obtained (0.024 g, 47%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotic acid. A yellow solid 127 was obtained (0.014 g, 28%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with nipecotic acid. A yellow solid 128 was obtained (0.034 g, 66%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-(2′-hydroxyethyl)piperidine. A yellow solid 129 was obtained (0.037 g, 73%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with cis-4-hydroxy-D-proline. A yellow solid 130 was obtained (0.038 g, 74%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with trans-4-hydroxy-L-proline. A yellow solid 131 was obtained (0.017 g, 33%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-(N-acetyl-N-methylamino)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 132 was obtained (0.022 g, 42%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with N-acetylhomopiperazine. A yellow solid 133 was obtained (0.021 g, 40%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-propylpiperazine. A yellow solid 135 was obtained (0.033 g, 64%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-allylpiperazine. A yellow solid 136 was obtained (0.037 g, 73%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-(2′-hydroxyethyl)piperazine. A yellow solid 137 was obtained (0.034 g, 67%).
- Example 38E The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-hydryoxymethylpiperidine. A yellow solid 138 was obtained (0.030 g, 60%).
- ICAM-1/LFA-1 antagonists prepared as 10 mM stock solutions in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), are diluted in D-PBS, 2mM MgCl 2 , 1% fish skin gelatin and 50 mL of each dilution added to duplicate wells. This is followed by addition of 50 mL of 0.8 mg/ml biotinylated recombinant ICAM-1/lg (ICOS Corporation) to the wells and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 1 hour.
- DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide
- the wells are then washed twice with wash buffer and 100 mL of Europium-labeled Streptavidin (Wallac Oy) diluted 1:100 in Delfia assay buffer (Wallac Oy) are added to the wells. Incubation proceeds for 1 hour at room temperature.
- the wells are washed eight times with wash buffer and 100 ⁇ L of enhancement solution (Wallac Oy, cat. No. 1244-105) are added to each well. Incubation proceeds for 5 minutes with constant mixing.
- % ⁇ ⁇ inhibition 100 ⁇ ⁇ 1 - average ⁇ ⁇ OD ⁇ ⁇ w ⁇ / ⁇ compound ⁇ ⁇ minus ⁇ ⁇ background average ⁇ ⁇ OD ⁇ ⁇ w ⁇ / ⁇ o ⁇ ⁇ compound ⁇ ⁇ minus ⁇ ⁇ background ⁇
- background refers to wells that are not coated with anti-LFA-1 antibody.
- the compounds inhibit the binding of ICAM-1 to LFA-1 with an IC 50 less than 20 micromolar.
- 96-well microtiter plates are coated with 70 ⁇ L of recombinant ICAM-1/lg (ICOS Corporation) at a concentration of 5 ⁇ g/mL in D-PBS w/o Ca ++ or Mg ++ overnight at 4° C. The wells are then washed twice with D-PBS and blocked by addition of 200 ⁇ L of D-PBS, 5% fish skin gelatin by incubation for 1 hour at room temperature.
- ICAM-1/lg ICAM-1/lg
- Fluorescent tagged JY-8 cells (a human EBV-transformed B cell line expressing LFA-1 on its surface; 50 ⁇ L at 2 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml in RPMI 1640 (standard cell culture medium)/1% fetal bovine serum) are added to the wells.
- RPMI 1640 standard cell culture medium
- fetal bovine serum For fluorescent labeling of JY-8 cells, 5 ⁇ 106 cells washed once in RPMI 1640 are resuspended in 1 mL of RPMI 1640 containing 2 ⁇ M Calceiun AM (MolecularProbes), are incubated at 37° C. for 30 minutes and washed once with RPMI-1640/1% fetal bovine serum.
- Dilutions of compounds to be assayed for ICAM-1/LFA-1 antagonistic activity are prepared in RPMI-1640/1% fetal bovine serum from 10 mM tock solutions in DMSO and 50 ⁇ L are added to duplicate wells. Microtiter plates are incubated for 45 minutes at room temperature and the wells are washed gently once with RPMI-1640/1% fetal bovine serum. Fluorescent intensity is measured in a fluorescent plate reader with an excitation wavelength at 485 nM and an emission wavelength at 530 nM.
- the ability of the compounds of this invention to treat arthritis can be demonstrated in a murine collagen-induced arthritis model according to the method of Kakimoto, et al., Cell Immunol 142: 326-337, 1992, in a rat collagen-induced arthritis model according to the method of Knoerzer, et al., Toxicol Pathol 25:13-19, 1997, in a rat adjuvant arthritis model according to the method of Halloran, et al., Arthitis Rheum 39: 810-819, 1996, in a rat streptococcal cell wall-induced arthritis model according to the method of Schimmer, et al., J Immunol 160: 1466-1477, 1998, or in a SCID-mouse human rheumatoid arthritis model according to the method of Oppenheimer-Marks et al., J Clin Invest 101: 1261-1272, 1998.
- graft-vs.-host disease graft-vs.-host disease
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Oncology (AREA)
- Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
- Vascular Medicine (AREA)
- Cardiology (AREA)
- Transplantation (AREA)
- Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
- Rheumatology (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
- Thiazole And Isothizaole Compounds (AREA)
- Pyridine Compounds (AREA)
- Heterocyclic Carbon Compounds Containing A Hetero Ring Having Nitrogen And Oxygen As The Only Ring Hetero Atoms (AREA)
- Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
Abstract
The present invention relates to novel heterocyclyl-containing diaryl sulfide compounds that are useful for treating inflammatory and immune diseases, to pharmaceutical compositions comprising these compounds, and to methods of inhibiting inflammation or suppressing immune response in a mammal.
Description
- This is a divisional of application Ser. No. 10/773,332, filed on Feb. 9, 2004, which is a divisional of application Ser. No. 09/888,840, filed Jun. 25, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,787,542, which claims benefit priority of U.S. provisional application No. 60/214,983, filed Jun. 29, 2000, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- The present invention relates to compounds that are useful for treating inflammatory and immune diseases, to pharmaceutical compositions comprising these compounds, and to methods of inhibiting inflammation or suppressing immune response in a mammal.
- Inflammation results from a cascade of events that includes vasodilation accompanied by increased vascular permeability and exudation of fluid and plasma proteins. This disruption of vascular integrity precedes or coincides with an infiltration of inflammatory cells. Infammatory mediators generated at the site of the initial lesion serve to recruit inflammatory cells to the site of the injury. These mediators (chemokines such as IL-8, MCP-1, MIP-1, and RANTES, complement fragments and lipid mediators) have chematactic activity for leukocytes and attract the inflammatory cells to the inflamed lesion. These chemotactic mediators which cause circulating leukocytes to localize at the site of inflammation require the cells to cross the vascular endothelium at a precise location. This leukocyte recruitment is accomplished by a process called cell adhesion.
- Cell adhesion occurs through a coordinately regulated series of steps that allow the leukocytes to first adhere to a specific region of the vascular endothelium and then cross the endothelial barrier to migrate to the inflamed tissue (Springer, T. A., 1994, “Traffic Signals for Lymphocyte Recirculation and Leukocyte Emigration: The Multistep Paradigm”, Cell, 76: 301-314; Lawrence, M. B., and Springer, T. A., 1991, “Leukocytes' Roll on a Selectin at Physiologic Flow Rates: Distinction from and Prerequisite for Adhesion Through Integrins”, Cell, 65: 859-873; von Adrian, U., Chambers, J. D., McEnvoy, L. M., Bargatze, R. F., Arfos, K. E, and Butcher, E. C., 1991, “Two-Step Model of Leukocyte-Endothelial Cell Interactions in Inflammation”, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA, 88: 7538-7542; and Ley, K., Gaehtgens, P., Fennie, C., Singer, M. S., Lasky, L. H. and Rosen, S. D.,1991, “Lectin-Like Cell Adhesion Molecule 1 Mediates Rolling in Mesenteric Venules in vivo”, Blood, 77: 2553-2555). These steps are mediated by families of adhesion molecules such as integrins, Ig supergene family members, and selectins which are expressed on the surface of the circulating leukocytes and on the vascular endothelial cells. The first step consists of leukocytes rolling along the vascular endothelial cell lining in the region of inflammation. The rolling step is mediated by an interaction between a leukocyte surface oligosaccharide, such as Sialylated Lewis-X antigen (SLex), and a selectin molecule expressed on the surface of the endothelial cell in the region of inflammation. The selectin molecule is not normally expressed on the surface of endothelial cells but rather is induced by the action of inflammatory mediators such as TNF-α and interleukin-1. Rolling decreases the velocity of the circulating leukocyte in the region of inflammation and allows the cells to more firmly adhere to the endothelial cell. The firm adhesion is accomplished by the interaction of integrin molecules that are present on the surface of the rolling leukocytes and their counter-receptors (the Ig superfamily molecules) on the surface of the endothelial cell. The Ig superfamily molecules or CAMs (Cell Adhesion Molecules) are either not expressed or are expressed at low levels on normal vascular endothelial cells. The CAM's, like the selecting, are induced by the action of inflammatory mediators like TNF-alpha and IL-1. The final event in the adhesion process is the extravasation of leukocytes through the endothelial cell barrier and their migration along a chemotactic gradient to the site of inflammation. This transmigration is mediated by the conversion of the leukocyte integrin from a low avidity state to a high avidity state. The adhesion process relies on the induced expression of selectins and CAM's on the surface of vascular endothelial cells to mediate the rolling and firm adhesion of leukocytes to the vascular endothelium.
- The interaction of the intercellular adhesion molecule ICAM-1 (cd54) on endothelial cells with the integrin LFA-1 on leukocytes plays an important role in endothelial-leukocyte contact. Leukocytes bearing high-affinity LFA-1 adhere to endothelial cells through interaction with ICAM-1, initiating the process of extravasation from the vasculature into the surrounding tissues. Thus, an agent which blocks the ICAM-1/LFA-1 interaction suppresses these early steps in the inflammatory response. Consistent with this background, ICAM-1 knockout mice have numerous abnormalities in their inflammatory responses.
- The present invention discloses compounds which bind to the interaction-domain (I-domain) of LFA-1, thus interrupting endothelial cell-leukocyte adhesion by blocking the interaction of LFA-1 with ICAM-1, ICAM-3, and other adhesion molecules. These compounds are useful for the treatment or prophylaxis of diseases in which leukocyte trafficking plays a role, notably acute and chronic inflammatory diseases, autoimmune diseases, tumor metastasis, allograft rejection, and reperfusion injury.
-
-
- with the proviso that at least one of R1 or R3 is
- wherein D, B, Y and Z at each occurrence are independently selected from the group consisting of —CR6═, —CR7R8—, —C(O)—, —O—, —SO2—, —S—, —N═, and —NR9—;
- n is an integer of zero to three;
- R6 , R7, R8 and R9, at each occurrence, are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, carboxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylaminocarbonyl alkyl, dialkylaminocarbonylalkyl and carboxyalkyl; and
- R10 and R11 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl and heterocyclylamino;
- wherein R10 and R11 may be joined to form a three to seven membered heterocyclyl ring, said ring being optionally substituted with one or more substituents R13, wherein R13, at each occurrence is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkylene, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkoxyalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxycarbonyl, carboxaldehyde, alkoxycarbonyl, arylalkoxycarbonyl, aminoalkyl, aminoalkanoyl, aminocarbonyl, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxamidoalkyl, cyano, tetrazolyl, alkanoyl, hydroxyalkanoyl, alkanoyloxy, alkanoylamino, alkanoyloxyalkyl, alkanoylaminoalkyl, sulfonate, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylaminocarbonyl, arylsulfonylaminocarbonyl and heterocyclylsulfonylaminocarbonyl;
- wherein A is an aryl or heterocyclyl group, said aryl or heterocyclyl group having at least one substituent R12, wherein R12 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, aryl, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxyalkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aminocarbonyl, alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl) aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, carboxaldehyde, carboxaldehyde hydrazone, carboxamide, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxyalkyl, carboxyalkoxy, carboxythioalkoxy, carboxycycloalkoxy, thioalkoxy, carboxyalkylamino, trans-cinnamyl, hydroxyalkylaminocarbonyl, cyano, amino, heterocyclylalkylamino, and heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl; and
- wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12 and R13 are unsubstituted or substituted with at least one electron donating or electron withdrawing group;
- or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, optical isomer or prodrug thereof.
- with the proviso that at least one of R1 or R3 is
- Presently preferred compounds of Formula I have R3 as Formula II (shown above), with substituents defined as above, R1 and R2 each independently as hydrogen, halogen, haloalkyl or nitro; and R4 and R5 each independently as hydrogen or alkyl.
-
-
- wherein R1, R2, R4 and R5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, cyano, nitro, cycloalkyl and carboxaldehyde;
- D, B, Y and Z are as defined above;
- R12, at each occurrence, is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl and heterocyclyl; and,
- p is an integer of zero to five;
- wherein R1, R2, R4, R5, R10, R11 and R12 are unsubstituted or substituted with at least one electron donating group or electron withdrawing group.
- Presently most preferred compounds of Formula III have p as one; R4 and R5 as hydrogen; R12 as halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl or heterocyclyl; and R10 and R11 joined to form a three to seven membered heterocyclyl ring; said ring being piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine or azetidine.
-
-
- wherein D and B are each independently selected from the group consisting of —N═ and —CR6═;
- R1 and R2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen and haloalkyl;
- R10 and R11 are as defined above for Formula I;
- R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl and heterocyclyl; and,
- p is an integer of zero to five;
- wherein R1, R2, R10, R11 and R12 are unsubstituted or substituted with at least one electron donating group or electron withdrawing group
- For presently most preferred compounds of Formula IV, p may be one; R12 may be halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl or heterocyclyl; and R10 and R11 may be joined to form a three to seven membered heterocyclyl ring; said ring being piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine or azetidine.
- The compounds represented by structural Formula 1, above, may be prepared by synthetic processes or by metabolic processes Processes for the preparation of the compounds of the present invention by metabolic processes include those occurring in the human or animal body (in vivo) or by processes occurring in vitro.
- The present invention is also directed to a method of treatment or prophylaxis in which the inhibition of inflammation or suppression of immune response is desired, comprising administering an effective amount of a compound having Formula I.
- In yet another embodiment of the invention are disclosed pharmaceutical compositions containing compounds of Formula I.
- The term “alkanoyl” as used herein refers to an alkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- The term “alkanoylamino” as used herein refers to an alkanoyl group attached to the parent molecular group though an amino group.
- The term “alkanoylaminoalkyl” as used herein refers to an alkanoylamino group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “alkanoyloxy” as used herein refers to an alkanoyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an oxygen radical.
- The term “alkanoyloxyalkyl” as used herein refers to an alkanoyloxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “alkoxy” as used herein refers to an alkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an oxygen atom.
- The term “alkoxyalkoxy” as used herein refers to an alkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkoxy group.
- The term “alkoxyalkyl” as used herein refers to an alkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “alkoxycarbonyl” as used herein refers to an alkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- The term “alkoxycarbonylalkyl” as used herein refers to an alkoxycarbonyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “alkyl” as used herein refers to a saturated straight or branched chain group of 1-10 carbon atoms derived from an alkane by the removal of one hydrogen atom.
- The term “alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl)amino” as used herein refers to an amino group substituted with one alkyl group and one alkoxycarbonylalkyl group.
- The term “alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl)aminoalkyl” as used herein refers to an alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl)amino group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “alkylene” as used herein refers to a divalent group of 1-10 carbon atoms derived from a straight or branched chain alkane by the removal of two hydrogen atoms.
- The term “alkylsulfonyl” as used herein refers to an alkyl radical attached to the parent molecular group through an —SO2— group.
- The term “alkylsulfonylaminocarbonyl” as used herein refers to an alkylsulfonyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an aminocarbonyl group.
- The term “amino” as used herein refers to a radical of the form —NRaRb, or to a radical of the form —NRa—, where Ra and Rb are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl or cycloalkyl.
- The term “aminoalkanoyl” as used herein refers to an amino group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkanoyl group.
- The term “aminoalkyl” as used herein refers to an amino group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “aminocarbonyl” as used herein refers to an amino group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- The term “aryl” as used herein refers to a mono- or bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings. The aryl group can also be fused to a cyclohexane, cyclohexene, cyclopentane or cyclopentene ring. The aryl groups of this invention can be optionally substituted with alkyl, halogen, hydroxy, or alkoxy substituents.
- The term “arylalkoxy” as used herein refers to an aryl group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkoxy group.
- The term “arylalkoxycarbonyl” as used herein refers to an arylalkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- The term “arylsulfonyl” as used herein refers to an aryl radical attached to the parent molecular group through an —SO2— group.
- The term “arylsulfonylaminocarbonyl” as used herein refers to an arylsulfonyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an aminocarbonyl group.
- The term “carboxaldehyde” as used herein refers to the radical —CHO.
- The term “carboxaldehyde hydrazone” as used herein refers to the radical —CH═N—NRcRd, where Rc and Rd are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl or cycloalkyl.
- The terms “carboxamide” or “carboxamido” as used herein refer to an amino group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- The term “carboxamidoalkyl” as used herein refers to a carboxamido group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “carboxy” as used herein refers to the radical —COOH.
- The term “carboxyalkyl” as used herein refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “carboxyalkylamino” as used herein refers to a carboxyalkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an amino group.
- The term “carboxyalkoxy” as used herein refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkoxy group.
- The term “carboxycarbonyl” as used herein refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- The term “carboxycycloalkoxy” as used herein refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a cycloalkoxy group.
- The term “carboxythioalkoxy” as used herein refers to a carboxy group attached to the parent molecular group through a thioalkoxy group.
- The term “cyano” as used herein refers to the radical —CN.
- The term “cycloalkyl” as used herein refers to a monovalent saturated cyclic or bicyclic hydrocarbon group of 3-12 carbons derived from a cycloalkane by the removal of a single hydrogen atom. Cycloalkyl groups may be optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, halo, or hydroxy substituents.
- The term “cycloalkoxy” as used herein refers to a monovalent saturated cyclic or bicyclic hydrocarbon group of 3-12 carbons derived from a cycloalkane by the removal of a single hydrogen atom, linked to the parent molecular group through an oxygen atom. Cycloalkoxy groups may be optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, halo or hydroxy groups.
- The terms “halo” or “halogen” as used herein refers to F, Cl, Br, or I.
- The term “haloalkyl” as used herein refers to an alkyl group substituted with one or more halogen atoms.
- The terms “heterocycle” or “heterocyclyl” represent a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered ring containing one, two or three heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. The 4- and 5-membered rings have zero to two double bonds and the 6- and 7-membered rings have zero to three double bonds. The term “heterocycle” or “heterocyclic” as used herein additionally refers to bicyclic, tricyclic and tetracyclic groups in which any of the above heterocyclic rings is fused to one or two rings independently selected from an aryl ring, a cyclobexane ring, a cyclohexene ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cyclopentene ring or another monocyclic heterocyclic ring. Heterocycles include acridinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuryl, benzothiazolyl, benzothienyl, benzoxazolyl, biotinyl, cinnolinyl, dihydrofuryl, dihydroindolyl, dihydropyranyl, dihydrothienyl, dithiazolyl, furyl, homopiperidinyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, isoquinolyl, isothiazolidinyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolidinyl, isoxazolyl, morpholinyl, oxadiazolyl, oxazolidinyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, pyranyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyridazinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrimidyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolidin-2-onyl, pyrrolinyl, pyrrolyl, quinolinyl, quinoxaloyl, tetrahydrofuryl, tetrahydroisoquinolyl, tetrahydroquinolyl, tetrazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolidinyl, thiazolyl, thienyl, thiomorpholinyl, triazolyl, and the like.
-
- Heterocyclics also include compounds of the formula
where X* and Z* are independently selected from —CH2—, —CH2NH—, —CH2O—, —NH— and —O—, with the proviso that at least one of X* and Z* is not —CH2—, and Y* is selected from —C(O)— and —(C(R″)2)v—, where R″ is hydrogen or alkyl of one to four carbons, and v is 1-3. These heterocycles include 1,3-benzodioxolyl, 1,4-benzodioxanyl, 1,3-benzimidazol-2-one and the like. The heterocycle groups of this invention can be optionally substituted with alkyl, halogen, hydroxy or alkoxy substituents. - The term “heterocyclylalkyl” as used herein refers to a heterocyclic group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “heterocyclylalkylamino” as used herein refers to an heterocyclylalkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an amino group.
- The term “heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl” as used herein refers to a heterocyclylalkylamino group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- The term “heterocyclylamino” as used herein refers to a heterocyclyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an amino group.
- The term “heterocyclylcarbonyl” as used herein refers to a heterocyclyl group attached to the parent molecular group through a carbonyl group.
- The term “heterocyclylsulfonyl” as used herein refers to a heterocyclyl radical attached to the parent molecular group through an —SO2— group.
- The term “heterocyclylsulfonylaminocarbonyl” as used herein refers to a heterocyclylsulfonyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an aminocarbonyl group.
- The term “hydroxyalkanoyl” as used herein refers to a hydroxy radical attached to the parent molecular group through an alkanoyl group.
- The term “hydroxyalkoxy” as used herein refers to a hydroxy radical attached to the parent molecular group through an alkoxy group.
- The term “hydroxyalkoxyalkyl” as used herein refers to a hydroxyalkoxy group attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “hydroxyalkyl” as used herein refers to a hydroxy radical attached to the parent molecular group through an alkyl group.
- The term “hydroxyalkylaminocarbonyl” as used herein refers to a hydroxyalkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through an aminocarbonyl group.
- The term “perfluoroalkyl” as used herein refers to an alkyl group in which all of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by fluoride atoms.
- The term “phenyl” as used herein refers to a monocyclic carbocyclic ring system having one aromatic ring. The phenyl group can also be fused to a cyclohexane or cyclopentane ring. The phenyl groups of this invention can be optionally substituted with alkyl, halogen, hydroxy or alkoxy substituents.
- The term “pharmaceutically-acceptable prodrugs” as used herein represents those prodrugs of the compounds of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the invention.
- The term “prodrug,” as used herein, represents compounds which are rapidly transformed in vivo to the parent compound of the above formula, for example, by hydrolysis in blood. A thorough discussion is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Edward B. Roche, ed., Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, both of which are incorporated herein by reference. The term “sulfonate” as used herein refers to the radical —SO3H.
- The term “tetrazole” or “tetrazolyl” as used herein refers to the heterocyclic radical —CN4H.
- The term “thioalkoxy” as used herein refers to an alkyl group attached to the parent molecular group through a sulfur atom. The term “trans-cinnamyl” as used herein refers to an acrylamido group (aminocarbonylethenyl) attached to the parent molecular group through C-3 of the acrylamido group, such that the aminocarbonyl and the parent molecular group exist in a trans relationship about the ethenyl group.
- The term “lower” refers to a C1-C6 unit for a particular functionality. For example, “lower alkyl” means C1-C6 alkyl.
- Use of the above terms is meant to encompass substituted and unsubstituted moieties. Substitution may be by one or more groups such as alcohols, ethers, esters, amides, sulfones, sulfides, hydroxyl, nitro, cyano, carboxy, amines, heteroatoms, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxyalkoxy, acyloxy, halogen, trifluoromethoxy, trifluoromethyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, alkylheterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, oxo, arylsulfonaminocarbonyl or any of the substituents of the preceding paragraphs or any of those substituents either attached directly or by suitable linkers. The linkers are typically short chains of 1-3 atoms containing any combination of —C—, —C(O)—, —NH—, —S—, —S(O)—, —O—, —C(O)O— or —S(O)—. Rings may be substituted multiple times.
- The terms “electron-withdrawing” or “electron-donating” refer to the ability of a substituent to withdraw or donate electrons relative to that of hydrogen if hydrogen occupied the same position in the molecule. These terms are well-understood by one skilled in the art and are discussed in Advanced Organic Chemistry by J. March, 1985, pp. 16-18, incorporated herein by reference.
- Electron withdrawing groups include halo, nitro, carboxyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, carboxaldehyde, carboxyamido, aryl, quaternary ammonium and trifluoromethyl among others. Electron donating groups include such groups as hydroxy, lower alkyl, amino, lower alkylamino, di(lower alkyl)amino, aryloxy, mercapto, lower alkylthio, lower alkylmercapto and disulfide among others. One skilled in the art will appreciate that the aforesaid substituents may have electron donating or electron withdrawing properties under different chemical conditions. Moreover, the present invention contemplates any combination of substituents selected from the above-identified groups.
- The most preferred electron donating or electron withdrawing substituents are halo, nitro, alkanoyl, carboxaldehyde, arylalkanoyl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxamide, cyano, sulfonyl, sulfoxide, heterocyclyl, guanidine, quaternary ammonium, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, sulfonium salts, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkyl, amino, lower alkylamino, di(lower alkylamino), amine lower mercapto, mercaptoalkyl, alkylthio and alkyldithio.
- As used herein, the tern “composition” is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from a combination of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts.
- Compounds of the present invention can exist as stereoisomers wherein asymmetric or chiral centers are present. These compounds are designated by the symbols “R” or “S,” depending on the configuration of substituents around the chiral carbon atom. The present invention contemplates various stereoisomers and mixtures thereof. Stereoisomers include enantiomers and diastereomers, and mixtures of enantiomers or diastereomers are designated (±). Individual stereoisomers of compounds of the present invention can be prepared synthetically from commercially available starting materials which contain asymmetric or chiral centers or by preparation of racemic mixtures followed by resolution well-known to those of ordinary skill in the art. These methods of resolution are exemplified by (1) attachment of a mixture of enantiomers to a chiral auxiliary, separation of the resulting mixture of diastereomers by recrystallization or chromatography and liberation of the optically pure product from the auxiliary, (2) salt formation employing an optically active resolving agent, or (3) direct separation of the mixture of optical enantiomers on chiral chromatographic columns.
- Geometric isomers can also exist in the compounds of the present invention. The present invention contemplates the various geometric isomers and mixtures thereof resulting from the arrangement of substituents around a carbon-carbon double bond or arrangement of substituents around a carbocyclic ring. Substituents around a carbon-carbon double bond are designated as being in the Z or E configuration wherein the term “Z” represents substituents on the same side of the carbon-carbon double bond and the term “E” represents substituents on opposite sides of the carbon-carbon double bond. The arrangement of substituents around a carbocyclic ring are designated as cis or trans wherein the term “cis” represents substituents on the same side of the plane of the ring and the term “trans” represents substituents on opposite sides of the plane of the ring. Mixtures of compounds wherein the substituents are disposed on both the same and opposite sides of plane of the ring are designated cis/trans.
- As is apparent from the foregoing descriptions, the compounds of Formula I are useful in a variety of forms, i.e., with various substitutions as identified. Examples of particularly desirable compounds are quite diverse, and many are mentioned herein.
- Compounds of the present invention include, but are not limited to: 1-(6-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrimidin-4-yl)-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid, 4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-6-(3-(2H-tretrazol-5-yl)-piperidin-1-yl)-pyrimidine, 4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-6-(4-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-piperidin-1-yl)-pyrimidine, (1-(6-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrimidin-4-yl)-piperidin-3-yl)-methanol, 2-(1-(6-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrimidin-4-yl)-piperidin-4-yl)-ethanol, N-(1-(4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrrolidin-3-yl)-acetamide, 1-(4-(4-(2-methoxy-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrrolidine-3-ol, N-1-(4-(4-(2-methoxy-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrrolidine-3-yl)-acetamide, N-1-(4-(4-(2-methoxy-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrrolidine-3-yl)-acetamide, N-(1-(4-(4-(2,3-dihydro-benzo(1,4)dioxin-6-ylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrrolidin-3-yl)-acetamide, 4′-(4-(2,3-dihydro-benzo(1,4)dioxin-6-ylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2H-(1,2′)bipyridinyl-4-carboxylic acid and 4′-(4-(2,3-dihydro-benzo(1,4)dioxin-6-ylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2H-(1,2′)bipyridinyl-3-carboxylic acid.
- Abbreviations which have been used in the schemes and the examples which follow are: DCM for methylene dichloride; EWG for electron withdrawing group; NMP for N-methylpyrrolidinone; sat. for saturated; THF for tetrahydrofuran; TFA for trifluoroacetic acid; BINAP for 2,2′-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1,1′-binaphthyl; DMSO for dimethylsulfoxide; MCPBA for meta-chloroperbenzoic acid; DMF for dimethylformamide; TLC for thin layer chromatography; HPLC for high pressure liquid chromatography; APCI for atmospheric pressure chemical ionization; ESI for electrospray ionization; DCI for direct chemical ionization; LFA for lymphocyte function-associated antigen; and ICAM for intercellular adhesion molecule.
- The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions which comprise compounds of the present invention formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers. The pharmaceutical compositions may be specially formulated for oral administration in solid or liquid form, for parenteral injection, or for rectal administration.
- The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracisternally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), bucally, or as an oral or nasal spray. The term “parenteral” administration as used herein refers to modes of administration which include intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrasternal, subcutaneous and intraarticular injection and infusion.
- Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention for parenteral injection comprise pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions as well as sterile powders for reconstitution into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use. Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers, diluents, solvents or vehicles include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil), and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
- These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservative, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like, Prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
- In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of the drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
- Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the drug in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio of drug to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissues.
- The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium just prior to use.
- Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules. In such solid dosage forms, the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or (a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, (b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidone, sucrose, and acacia, (c) humectants such as glycerol, (d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, (e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, (f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, (g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate, (h) absorbents such as kaolin and bentonite clay, and (I) lubricants such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage form may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
- The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
- The active compounds can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-mentioned excipients.
- Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically-acceptable emulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active compounds, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethyl formamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
- Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
- Suspensions, in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar, and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
- Compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at room temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
- Compounds of the present invention can also be administered in the form of liposomes. As is known in the art, liposomes are generally derived from phospholipids or other lipid substances. Liposomes are formed by mono- or multi-lamellar hydrated liquid crystals that are dispersed in an aqueous medium. Any non-toxic, physiologically-acceptable and metabolizable lipid capable of forming liposomes can be used. The present compositions in liposome form can contain, in addition to a compound of the present invention, stabilizers, preservatives, excipients, and the like. The preferred lipids are the phospholipids and the phosphatidyl cholines (lecithins), both natural and synthetic.
- Methods to form liposomes are known in the art. See, for example, Prescott, Ed., Methods in Cell Biology, Volume XI, Academic Press, New York, N.Y. (1976), p. 33 et seq.
- The compounds of the present invention may be used in the form of pharmaceutically-acceptable salts derived from inorganic or organic acids. By “pharmaceutically-acceptable salt” is meant those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically-acceptable salts are well-known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describe pharmaceutically-acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66: 1 et seq. The salts may be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention or separately by reacting a free base function with a suitable acid. Representative acid addition salts include, but are not limited to acetate, adipate, alginate, citrate, aspartate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, bisulfate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, digluconate, glycerophosphate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, fumarate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate (isethionate), lactate, maleate, methanesulfonate, nicotinate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, oxalate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, succinate, tartrate, thiocyanate, phosphate, glutamate, bicarbonate, p-toluenesulfonate and undecanoate. Also, the basic nitrogen-containing groups can be quaternized with such agents as lower alkyl halides such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides; dialkyl sulfates like dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl and diamyl sulfates; long chain halides such as decyl, lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides; arylalkyl halides like benzyl and phenethyl bromides and others. Water or oil-soluble or dispersible products are thereby obtained. Examples of acids which may be employed to form pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts include such inorganic acids as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulphuric acid and phosphoric acid and such organic acids as oxalic acid, maleic acid, succinic acid and citric acid.
- Basic addition salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of compounds of this invention by reacting a carboxylic acid-containing moiety with a suitable base such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically acceptable metal cation or with ammonia or an organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine. Pharmaceutically-acceptable basic addition salts include, but are not limited to, cations based on alkali metals or alkaline earth metals such as lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium and aluminum salts and the like and nontoxic quaternary ammonia and amine cations including ammonium, tetramethylammonium, tetraethylammonium, methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, triethylamine, diethylamine, ethylamine and the like. Other representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperidine, piperazine and the like.
- Dosage forms for topical administration of a compound of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments and inhalants. The active compound is mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required. Opthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders and solutions are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
- Actual dosage levels of active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active compound(s) that is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, compositions, and mode of administration. The selected dosage level will depend upon the activity of the particular compound, the route of administration, the severity of the condition being treated, and the condition and prior medical history of the patient being treated. However, it is within the skill of the art to start doses of the compound at levels lower than required for to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and to gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved. Generally dosage levels of about 0.1 to about 50 mg, more preferably of about 5 to about 20 mg of active compound per kilogram of body weight per day are administered orally or intravenously to a mammalian patient. If desired, the effective daily dose may be divided into multiple doses for purposes of administration, e.g. two to four separate doses per day.
- The compounds and processes of the present invention may be better understood in connection with the following synthetic schemes which illustrate the methods by which the compounds of the invention can be prepared.
- Scheme I describes compounds of Formula I which contain oxazole (n=0, Y═N, B═O, D=C). Aryl methyl ketone 1 with the approprite substitutions and a leaving group X reacts with an aryl thiol to give biaryl sulfide 2. Biarylsulfide can be converted into alpha-bromomethyl ketone 3 using a variety of reagents including Bu4NBr3. Condensation of 3 with a urea then gives the desired compounds 4.
- Another method of preparing compounds of Formula I containing oxazole (n=0, Y═N, B═O, D=C) is illustrated in Scheme 2. Aryl methyl ketones 1 are converted into alpha-hydroxymethyl ketone 5, which then can be reacted with arylthiols to give biaryl sulfide 6. Acid-catalyzed condensation of 6 with KOCN affords 2-hydroxy oxazole 7, which can be converted into 2-chloro-oxazole 8 using POCl3. Displacement of the chloride of 8 with amines gives the desired 2-amino-oxazole 9.
- Scheme 3 describes the synthesis of a class of compounds of Formula I containing thioazole ring (n=0, Y═N, B═S, D=C). The biaryl sulfide alpha-bromomethyl ketone 3 can be prepared following the procedure outline in Scheme 1. Condensation of 3 with a properly substituted thiourea gives the desired 2-aminothioazole 10.
- Another class of compounds of Formula I are compounds containing pyrimidine ring, for example 4,6-disubstituted pyrimidines (n=1, Y═C, B═N, Z=C, D=N). Scheme 4 describes one procedure for the preparation of this class of compounds. Reaction of biaryl sulfide methyl ketone 2 with diethyl carbonate under base-catalysis leads to beta-ketoester 11. Condensation of 11 with formamidine gives 4-hydroxy pyrimidine 12, which can be converted into 4-chloropyrimidine 13. Displacement of the chloride of 13 by amines then gives the desired 4-amino-pyrimidine 14.
- An alternative synthesis of the 4,6-disubstituted pyrimidines is illustrated in Scheme 5. Nucleophilic substitution of aryl fluoride 15 with aryl thiol under base-catalysis gives biaryl sulfide 16. Transmetallation of 16 with n-BuLi/ZnCl2, followed by Pd-catalyzed cross-coupling with 4,6-diiodopyrimidine leads to iodopyrimidine 17. Reaction of 17 with selected amines gives the desired 4-aminopyrimidine 14.
- Yet another class of compounds of Formula I are compounds containing a pyridine ring, for example 2,4-disubstituted pyridines (n=1, Y═C, B═N, Z=C, D=C). Scheme 6 describes one procedure for the preparation of this class of compounds. Thus, Pd-catalyzed cross-coupling of properly substituted 1-bromo-4-fluoro-benzene 15 and 4-pyridine boronic acid gives compounds 18. Oxidation of 18 with MCPBA leads to pyridinium oxide 19. Displacement of the fluoride of 19 with aryl thiols then affords biarylsulfide 20. Treatment of 20 with POCl3 leads to 2-chloropyridine 21. Finally, reaction of 21 with selected amines gives the desired 2-aminopyridines 22.
- The compounds and processes of the present invention will be better understood in connection with the following examples which are intended as an illustration of and not a limitation upon the scope of the invention.
-
- 1A. First, 1-(4-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone 24 was prepared as follows. To a solution of o-isopropyl thiophenol (2.46 ml, 15 mmole) and 4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl acetophenone (3.0 g, 14.6 mmole) in 100 ml of DMF was added Cs2CO3 (7.15 g, 22 mmole). After stirring for 3 hours, the mixture was filtered and solvent was removed by evaporation. The residue was chromatographed on a silica gel column, eluting with 5% EtOAc in hexane, giving 4.70 g of a white solid 24. Yield: 96.6%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ1.18 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 6H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 3.45 (heptet, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.81 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.26 (m, 1H), 4.48 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.79 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 8.21 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 339 (M+H)+; 356 (M+NH4)+.
- 1B. Then 2-bromo-1-(4-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone 25 was prepared as follows. Compound 24 (4.72 g, 14.0 mmole) and tetrabutylammonium tribromide (7.6 g, 15.4 mmole) was dissolved in a mixture of 20 ml of MeOH and 50 ml of DCM. The solution was stirred at ambient temperature overnight. The solvent was then evaporated and the residue was chromatographed on a silica gel column, eluting with 10% EtOAc in hexane. An off-white solid 25 was obtained, 5.9 g, 100%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ1.18 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 6H), 3.45 (heptate, J=6.9 Hz, 1H). 4.35 (s, 2H), 6.81 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (d.d, J=2.4, 6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.56 (m, 3H), 7.81 (d.d, J=2.4, 6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.79 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 8.24 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 418 (M+H)+; 434 (M+NH4)+.
- 1C. A solution of compound 25 (22 mg, 0.05 mmole) and 1-carbamyl piperidine (32 mg, 0.25 mmole) was stirred at 105° C. for 2 hours. DMF was then evaporated and the residue purified on a preparative HPLC system with a C8 reverse-phase column using 10 mM H4NOAc (aq.) and CH3CN as the mobile phase. The product 23 was obtained as a yellow solid (16 mg) from the HPLC fractions by evaporating the solvents on a speedvac. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ1.18 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 6H), 1.5-1.7 (m, 6H), 3.5-3.7 (m, 5 H), 6.91 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.34-7.38 (m, 3H), 7.47 (s, 1H), 7.58-7.60 (m, 1H), 7.96 (s, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 447 (M+H)+.
-
- 2A. First, 1-(4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-2-hydroxy-ethanone 27 was prepared as follows. To a solution of 1-fluoro-3-trifluoroacetophenone (1.0 g, 5.0 mmole) in acetonitrile (15 ml) and water (3 ml) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.77 ml, 10 mmole) and bis-(trifluoroacetoxyl)iodobenzene (4.3 g, 10 mmole). The mixture was refluxed for three hours. The solution was concentrated and then extracted with EtOAc (3×30 ml). The combined organic solution was washed with 5% aq. NaHCO3 and dried. After filtration and solvent evaporation, the residue was chromatographed on a silica gel column, eluting with 30% EtOAc in hexane, giving 0.47 g of a white solid 27, 37.8% yield. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ 3.28 (br s, 1 H), 4.89 (s, 2H), 7.36 (t, J=9 Hz, 1H), 8.12-8.17 (m, 1H), 8.21 (d, J=6 Hz, 3H); MS (APCI) m/z 223 (M+H)+.
- 2B. Then 2-hydroxy-1-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone 28 was prepared as follows. To a solution of compound 27 (0.4 g, 1.8 mmole) and o-isopropylthiophenol (0.31 ml, 1.8 mmole) in DMF (10 ml) was added Cs2CO3 (0.59 g, 1.8 mmole). The mixture was stirred for 10 minutes and EtOAc (30 ml) was added. The mixture was filtered, concentrated and chromatographed on a silica gel column eluting with 30% EtOAc in hexane. The desired product 28 was obtained as an oil, 0.22 g, 34.8%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ1.17 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 6 H), 3.40-3.46 (m, 2 H), 4.80 (s, 2H), 6.82 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.27-7.31 (m, 1H), 7.51-7.55 (m, 3H), 7.72 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 355 (M+H)+, 372 (M+NH)+.
- 2C. Then 4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-3H-oxaxol-2-one 29 was prepared as follows. To a solution of compound 28 (0.22 g, 0.62 mmole) and potassium cyanate 0.25 g, 3.0 mmole) in DMF 5.0 ml) was added 0.5 ml of 4 M HCl in dioxane. The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 hours and another 0.25 ml of 4 M HCl in dioxane was added. The mixture was stirred for another 10 minutes and then quenched with water (20 ml). The layers were separated and the organic layer was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic solution was dried, filtered and concentrated. Chromatography of the residue gave the title compound 29 as a yellow solid. 194 mg, 82.6%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) 61.18 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 6H), 3.48 (heptet, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 6.87 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (s, 1H), 7.27 (m, 2H), 7.44-7.48 (m, 3H), 7.64 (s, 1H), 9.75 (s, 1H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 397 (M+NH4)+.
- 2D. Then, 2-chloro-4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-oxazole 30 was prepared as follows. A solution of compound 29 (197 mg, 0.52 mmole) and diethylphenylamine (0.085 ml) in phosphorus oxychloride (5.0 ml) was refluxed for two hours. The mixture was then concentrated and the residue was quenched with ice-water, followed by extraction with EtOAc. The EtOAc solution was dried, filtered and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed on a 10-g silica gel cartridge, eluting with 30% EtOAc in hexane. The title compound 30 was obtained as a yellow solid. 97 mg, 47.0% yield. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ1.19 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 6H), 3.50 (heptet, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 6.88 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.23 (m, 1H), 7.42-7.44 (m, 3H), 7.55 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (s, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 398 (M+H), 415 (M+NH4)+.
- 2E. A solution of compound 30 (20 mg, 0.05 mmole) and 1-acetyl piperazine (19.2 mg, 0.15 mmole) in toluene (1.0 ml) was stirred at 100° C. for five hours. Solvent was evaporated and the residue was purified on a 5-g silica gel cartridge eluting with EtOAc. The title compound 26 was obtained as a white solid. 11.2 mg, 45.8%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ1.18 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 6H), 2.15(s, 3H), 3.49-3.62 (m, 7H), 3.74 (m, 2H), 6.89 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.15-7.21 (m, 2H), 7.39-7.41 (m, 2H), 7.52 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.96 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 490(M+H)+.
-
- A solution of compound 25 (40 mg, 1.0 mmole) and 1-acetyl-4-thiocarbamyl piperazine (19 mg, 0.1 mmole) in 1.0 ml of DMF was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 hours. Then the solvent was evaporated and the residue was purified on a preparative HPLC with a C8 reverse phase column, eluting with a gradient of acetonitrile and 10 mM NH4OAc buffer. The title compound 31 was obtained as a yellow solid. 45 mg, 80.0% yield. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ1.12 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 6H), 2.08 (s, 3H), 3.40-3.49 (m, 3H), 3.55 (br s, 2H), 3.71 (m, 2H), 6.74 (s, 1H), 6.83 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.08-7.13 (m, 1H), 7.31-7.34 (m, 3H), 7.64 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 490 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedure of Example 3 from compound 25 (20 mg, 0.05 mmole) and N-(1-methoxy)propyl thiourea (14.8 mg, 0.1 mmole). Yield: 11.7 mg, 50.8%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ1.18 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 1.95 (pentaplet, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 3.36 (s, 3H), 3.42-3.45 (m, 2H), 3.51-3.54 (m, 3H), 6.66 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 7.17-7.20 (m, 1H), 7.39-7.42 (m, 3H), 7.68 (dd, J=10.5 and 2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.06 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H). MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 467 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedure of Example 3 from compound 25 (20 mg, 0.05 mmole) and 1-thiocarbamyl-piperidine (14.4 mg, 0.1 mmole).
- Yield: 4.9 mg, 10.6%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ1.18 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 1.95 (pentet, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 1.56-1.72 (m, 6H), 3.50-3.57 (m, 5H), 6.70 (s, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 7.15-7.19 (m, 1H), 7.37-7.40 (m, 3H), 7.78 (dd, J=10.5 and 2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 463 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedure of Example 3 from compound 25 (20 mg, 0.05 mmole) and N-[1-(1′-morpholinyl)]propylthiourea (19 mg, 0.1 mmole). Yield: 25.4 mg, 97.7%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ 1.18 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 1.86-1.89 (m, 2H), 2.54-2.59 (m, 6H), 3.52 (heptet, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 3.77-3.79 (m, 4H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 7.15-7.19 (m, 1H), 7.38-7.40 (m, 3H), 7.69 (dd, J=10.5 and 2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.10 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 522 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedure of Example 3 from compound 25 (20 mg, 0.05 mmole) and N-(1-methoxyl)ethylthiourea (14 mg, 0.1 mmole). Yield: 11 mg, 50%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ 1 .18 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 3.39 (s, 3H), 3.50-3.55 (m, 3H), 3.62 (t, J=5.5 Hz, 2H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 7.16-7.21 (m, 1H), 7.38-7.42 (m, 3H), 7.68 (dd, J=10.5 and 2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.07 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 453(M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedure of Example 3 from compound 25 (20 mg, 0.05 mmole) and N-[1-(1′-morpholinyl)]ethyl thiourea (14 mg, 0.1 mmole). Yield: 20.3 mg, 81.2%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ 1.18 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 2.56 (br s, 4H), 2.71 (br s, 2H), 3.44 (br s, 2H), 3.52 (heptet, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 3.76-3.78 (m, 4H), 5.88 (br s, 1H), 6.70 (s, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 7.15-7.19 (m, 1H), 7.38-7.40 (m, 3H), 7.69 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 8.12 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 508 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedure of Example 3 from compound 25 (20 mg, 0.05 mmole) and N-[1-(1′-piperidinyl)]ethyl thiourea (20 mg, 0.1 mmole). Yield: 21 mg, 85.0%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ 1.18 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 1.51 (m, 2H), 1.68-1.74 (m, 4H), 2.64 (bs, 4H), 2.80 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 1H), 3.49-3.56 (m, 3H), 4.64 (bs, 1H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 7.15-7.19 (m, 1H), 7.38-7.41 (m, 3H), 7.69 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H). MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 506 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedure of Example 3 from compound 25 (20 mg, 0.05 mmole) and N-furfuryl thiourea (16 mg, 0.1 mmole). Yield: 9.4 mg, 40.0%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ 1.18 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 3.51 (heptet, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 4.53 (s, 2H), 6.34 (s, 2H), 6.71 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 7.18-7.21 (m, 1H), 7.38-7.43 (m, 4H), 7.70 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 8.07 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H). MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 475 (M+H)+.
-
- 11A. First, 1-(2,3-dichloro-4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)phenyl)ethanene 40 was prepared as follows. To a solution of o-isopropyl thiophenol (3.14 g, 25 mmole) and 2,3,4-trichloro-acetophenone (5.9 g, 25 mmole) in DMF (100 ml) was added Na2CO3 (2.65 g, 25 mmole). The reaction was quenched with water (300 ml) after stirring for 50 hours at ambient temperature. The solution was extracted with EtOAc (3×100 ml). The combined EtOAc solution was dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed on a silica gel column, eluting with 10% EtOAc in hexane, giving the title compound 40 as a white solid, 3.4 g, 40.5%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 2.66 (s, 3H), 3.43 (heptaplet, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.30 (m, 1H), 7.48-7.53 (m, 3H). MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 339, 341 (M+H)+; 356, 358 (M+NH4)+.
- 11B. Then 2-bromo-1-(2,3-dichloro-4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-phenyl)-ethanone 41 was prepared as follows. A solution of Br2 (50 mg) in dioxane (1.0 ml) was added to a solution of compound 40 (100 mg, 0.3 mmole) in 2 ml of dioxane. The solution was then stirred for another 10 minutes and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc and purified on a 5-g silica gel cartridge, giving the desired product 41 as a white solid. 136 mg, ˜100%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 3.43 (heptet, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 4.45 (s, 2H), 6.42 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.31 (m, 1H), 7.49-7.54 (m, 3H); MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 436 (M+NH4)+.
- 11C. A solution of compound 41 (30 mg, 0.07 mmole) and 1-thiocarbamyl-4-acetyl piperazine (20.5 mg, 0.11 mmole) in DMF (1.0 ml) was stirred at ambient temperature for two hours. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was purified on a 5-g silica gel cartridge, giving the desired product 39 as a white solid. 23 mg, 65.7%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 2.14 (s, 3H), 3.46-3.60 (m, 7H),), 3.75-3.78 (m, 2H), 6.48 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (s, 1H), 7.21 (m, 1H), 7.44-7.51 (m, 3H), 7.57 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H). MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 506 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound 42 was prepared according to the procedure of Example 11 from compound 41 (30 mg, 0.07 mmole) and 1-thiocarbamyl piperidine. Yield: 21 mg, 65.6%. 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 6H), 1.65 (m, 6H), 3.44-3.52 (m, 5H), ), 6.48 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 7.21 (m, 1H), 7.44-7.51 (m, 3H), 7.61 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H). MS (DCI/NH3) m/z 463 (M+H)+.
-
- 13A First, 1-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone 44 was prepared as follows. To a solution of 4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-acetophenone (7.00 g, 34.0 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) was added 2-isopropylthiophenol (6.33 g, 37.4 mmol) followed by cesium carbonate (16.6 g, 51.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was partitioned between ethyl acetate (250 mL) and water (250 mL). The organic layer was separated, washed with brine (5×250 mL), dried over MgSO4 and filtered. After evaporating the solvent, the crude material was loaded to a silica gel column, eluting with 5% ethyl acetate in hexane to give a colorless oil 44 (11.5 g, 100%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ 1.17 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 3.46 (heptete, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 6.80 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.24-7 29 (m, 1H), 7.45-7.50 (m, 2H), 7.53 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.79 (dd, J=2.0 Hz, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.21 (d, J=1.4 Hz, 1H). MS (DCI) m/z 339 (M+H)+; 356 (M+NH4)+.
- 13B. Then, 3-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-3-oxo-propionic acid ethyl ester 45 was prepared as follows. To a solution of compound 44 (11.5 g, 34.0 mmol) in THF (150 mL) was added 60% sodium hydride in mineral oil (1.84 g, 40.8 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 minutes. Diethyl carbonate (46.5 mL, 340 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated under reflux for 2 hours. 10% HCl aq. (100 mL) was added and the solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL). The organic layer was separated, washed with brine (5×250 mL), dried over MgSO4 and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated on a rotor-vapor to give a brown oil 45 (10.6 g, 76%); MS (DCI) m/z 411 (M+H)+; 428 (M+NH4)+.
- 13C. Then, 6-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrimidin-4-ol 46 was prepared as follows. The mixture of compound 45 (10.6 g, 25.8 mmol) and formamidine hydrochloride (10.4 g, 129 mmol) in 20% HOAc in DMF (50 mL) was heated at 120° C. for 3 days. MeOH (50 mL) was added and the resulting solution was purified on a preparative HPLC column, C8 reverse-phase column, eluted with NH4OAc—H2O—CH3CN. Evaporation of solvents gave a white solid 46 (1.40 g, 14%); MS (APCI) m/z 391 (M+H)+.
- 13D. Then, 4-chloro-6-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrimidine 47 was prepared as follows. Compound 46 (1.40 g, 3.59 mmol) was treated with POCl3 (30 mL) at 60° C. for an hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotor-vapor, and the residue was treated with crushed ice (10 g). Water (50 mL) was added. The aqueous solution was then extracted with ethyl acetate (2×50 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (3×50 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by chromatography to give a brown oil 47 (0.74 g, 51%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H), 3.50 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 6.89 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.24-7.28 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.50 (m, 2H), 7.54 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.68 (s, 1H), 7.93 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 9.00(s, 1H). MS (DCI) m/z 409, 411 (M+H)+.
- 13E. To a solution of compound 47 (0.015 g, 0.0367 mmol) in DMF (1.0 mL) was added morpholine followed by potassium carbonate (0.015 g, 0.109 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for 16 hours. The solid was removed through filtration, and the filtrate was directly purified by preparative HPLC, to give a yellow solid, 43 (0.012 g, 72%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 3.51 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.69 (t, J=4.9 Hz, 4H), 3.81 (t, J=4.9 Hz, 4H), 6.80 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.24 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.67(s, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 460 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound 48 was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 4-hydroxypiperidine. A yellow solid was obtained (0.012 g, 71%). 1H-NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 1.14 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H), 1.48-1.52 (m, 2H), 1.87-1.90 (m, 2H), 3.10-3.70 (m, 4H, overlapping with the solvent H2O peak), 4.38-4 42 (m, 2H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.32-7.35 (m, 2H), 7.47-7.55 (m, 3H), 8.25 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 8.55 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 474 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 2,6-dimethylmorpholine. A yellow solid 49 was obtained (0.013 g, 73%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.18 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H), 1.28 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 6H), 2.65 (dd, J=2.1, 10.6 Hz, 2H), 3.52 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.65-3.70 (m, 2H), 4.24 (br d, J=11.5 Hz, 2H), 6.78 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.24 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.27 {s, 1H), 8.66(s, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 488 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with nipecotamide. A yellow solid 50 was obtained (0.014 g, 74%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.54-1.66 (m 1H), 1.76-1.84 (m, 1H), 1.96-2.12 (m, 2H), 2.46-2.53 (m, 1H), 3.27-3.35 (m, 1H), 3.51 (heptaplet, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 3.70-3.76 (m, 1H), 3.94-4.01 (br, 1H), 4.20-4.26 (m, 1H), 5.44 (s, br, 1H), 6.10 (s, br, 1H), 6.84 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 8.64 (s, 1H), MS (APCI) m/z 501 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with iso-nipecotamide. A yellow solid 51 was obtained (0.013 g, 69%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.71-1.82 (m, 2H), 1.97-2.04 (m, 2H), 2.44-2.53 (m, 1H), 3.07 (t, J=12.5 Hz, 2H), 3.52 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.49 (d, J=13.6 Hz, 2H), 5.49 (br s, 1H), 5.59 (br s, 1H), 6.83 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.24 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 501 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 3-N-acetyl-N-ethylamino)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 52 was obtained (0.014 g, 72%). MS (APCI) m/z 529 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with ethyl nipecotate. A yellow solid 53 was obtained (0.011 g, 56%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H), 1.25 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.57-1.60 (m, 1H), 1.79-1.88 (m, 2H), 2.10-2.14 (m, 1H), 2.54-2.59 (m, 1H), 3.21-3.38 (m, 1H), 3.35-3.40 (m, 1H), 3.52 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.11-4.18 (m, 1H), 4.16 (q, J=7.2, 2H), 4.38-4.44 (m, 1H), 6.86 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 530 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with ethyl isonipecotate. A yellow solid 54 was obtained (0.012 g, 61%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19(d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.27 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.71-1.81 (m, 2H), 2.00-2.04 (m, 2H), 2.58-2.65 (m, 1H), 3.11-3.18 (m, 2H), 3.52 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.16 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 4.32-4.38 (m, 2H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.24 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 530 (144H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with ethyl piperazine-1-carboxylate. A yellow solid 55 was obtained (0.019 g, 96%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.29 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 3.51 (heptaplet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.59-3.62 (m, 4H), 3.71-3.75 (m, 4H), 4.19 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 6.81 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.19-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.42-7.45 (m, 2H), 7.46-7.50 (m, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 531 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 1-(ethoxycarbonylmethyl)piperazine. A yellow solid 56 was obtained (0.007 g, 37%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.18 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.29 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 2.70 (br, 4H), 3.28 (s, 2H), 3.51 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.78 (br m, 4H), 4.21 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 6.80 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.21-7.27 (m, 1H). 7.42-7.45 (m, 2H), 7.46-7.50 (m, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 545 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 1-(3-aminopropyl)imidazole. A yellow solid 57 was obtained (0.010 g, 54%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.18 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.16 (p, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 3.36-3.41 (m, 2H), 3.51 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.10 (t, J=6.7, 2H), 6.58 (s, 1H), 6.89 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 7.09 (s, 1H), 7.21-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.43-7.46 (m 2H), 7.49 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (s, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=8.4Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 498 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with isonipecotic acid. A yellow solid 58 was obtained (0.004 g, 24%). 1H NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 1.14 (d,J=7.2 Hz, 6H), 1.48-1.52 (m, 2H), 1.87-1.90 (m, 2H), 3.10-3.790 (m, 4H, overlapping with the solvent H2O peak), 4.38-4.42 (m, 2H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.31-7.35 (m, 2H), 7.47-7.55 (m, 3H), 8.25 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 8.55 (s, 1H), MS (APCI) m/z 502 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with nipecotic acid. A yellow solid 59 was obtained (0.011 g, 57%). 1H-NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 1.14 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H), 1.43-1.46 (m, 2H), 1.63-1.72 (m, 2H), 1.97-1.20 (m, 1H), 2.36-2.41 (m, 1H), 3.10-3.70 (m, 2H, overlapping with the solvent H2O peak), 4.24-4.28 (m, 1H), 4.46-4.52 (m, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.30-7.33 (m, 1H), 7.38 (s, 1H), 7.46 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.57 (m, 2H), 8.25 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 8.55 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 502 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 1-(2-pyridyl)piperazine. A yellow solid 60 was obtained (0.013 g, 65%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 3.52 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.71 (t, J=5.3 Hz, 4H), 3.87 (t, J=5.3 Hz, 4H), 6.66-6.69 (m, 2H), 6.84 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.21-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.47-7.55 (m, 2H), 7.88 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.21-8.23 (m, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.68 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 536 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with N,N-diethyl nipecotamide. A yellow solid 61 was obtained (0.014 g, 69%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.13 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.21 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.52-1.59 (m, 1H), 1.82-1.99 (m, 3H), 2.61-2.69 (m, 1H), 3.30 (m, 1H), 3.15 (m, 1H), 3.32-3.45 (m, 4H), 3.52 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.35-4.41 (br, 1H), 4.58-4.65 (br, 1H), 6.82 (s, 1H). 6.90 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.21-7.24 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.63 (s, 1H); MS (DCI) m/z 557 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 3-(5′-tetrazolyl)-piperidine. A yellow solid 62 was obtained (0.004 g, 21%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.18 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.45-1.56 (m, 1H), 1.68-1.77 (m, 1H), 2.17-2.27 (m, 1H), 2.51-2.59 (m, 1H), 3.42-3.51 (m, 2H), 3.50 (heptaplet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.66-3.73 (m, 1H), 3.92-3.98 (m, 1H), 4.51-4 57 (m, 1H), 6.86-6.91 (m, 2H), 7.21-7.28 (m, 1H), 7.43-7.51 (m, 3H), 7.85 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.23 (s, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 526 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 4-(5′-tetrazolyl)-piperidine. A yellow solid 63 was obtained (0.008 g, 40%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.17 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.78-182 (m, 2H), 2.10-2.15 (m, 2H), 3.11-3.19 (m, 2H), 3.29-3.37 (m, 1H), 3.49 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.43-4.49 (br, 2H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 6.88 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.18-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.42 (s, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.46 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 526 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 3-hydroxymethyl piperidine. A yellow solid 64 was obtained (0.012 g, 67%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.17 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.78-182 (m, 2H), 2.10-2.15 (m, 2H), 3.11-3.19 (m, 2H), 3.29-3.37 (m, 1H), 3.49 (heptaplet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.43-4.49 (br, 2H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 6.88 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.18-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.42 (s, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.46 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 488 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 4-(2′-hydroxyethyl)-piperidine. A yellow solid 65 was obtained (0.013 g. 68%). 1H-NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 1.06-1.09 (m, 1H), 1 .14 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H), 1.37-1.38 (m, 2H), 1.73-1.75 (m, 3H), 2.90 (t, J=10.8 Hz, 1H), 3.74-3.48 (m, 3H), 4.35-4.37 (m, 1H), 4.51-4.54 (m, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.30-7.33 (m, 2H), 7.46 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.57 (m, 2H), 8.25 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 502 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 66 was obtained (0.012 g, 67%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.00 (s, 3H), 2.02-2.08 (m, 1H), 2.30-2.39 (m, 1H), 3.38-3.52 (br, 1H), 3.51 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.60-3.70 (br, 1H), 3.78-3.87 (m, 1H), 4.58-4.66 (m, 1H), 5.62-5.68 (m, 1H), 6.59 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.28 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 501 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with (R)-(+)-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 67 was obtained (0.011 g, 63%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.01-2.15 (m, 4H), 3.36 (s, 3H), 3.38-3.62 (m, 4H), 3.52 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.36 (s, br, 1H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.18-7.26 (m, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.47 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 8.64 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 488 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with (R)-(+)-3-pyrrolidinol. A yellow solid 68 was obtained (0.012 g, 73%). 1H-NMR (DMSO, 460 MHz) δ1.14 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H), 1.80-2.10 (m, 2H), 3.43 (heptet, 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.54 (br s, 3H), 4.22 (m, 1H), 5.10 (m, 1H), 6.92 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 7.31-7.35 (m, 1H), 7.47 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.57 (m, 2H), 8.25 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 460 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with 3-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 69 was obtained (0.015 g, 72%). 1H-NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ1.14 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H), 1.39 (s, 9H), 1.90 (br s, 1H),2.18 (br s, 1H), 3.43 (heptet, 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.54 (br s, 4H), 4.18 (m, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 7.22 (br s, 1H), 7.31-7.35 (m, 1H), 7.47 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.57 (m, 2H), 8.25 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 459 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with N-methylisopropylamine. A yellow solid 70 was obtained (0.009 g, 57%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.22 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.93 (s, 3H), 3.52 (heptaplet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 6.69 (s, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.19-7.24 (m, 1H), 7.42 (s, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.27 (s, 1H), 8.64 (s, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 446. (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 13E, substituting morpholine with N-ethylmethylamine. A yellow solid 71 was obtained 0.009 g, 56). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H) 1.21 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 3.11 (s, 3H), 3.52 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.64 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.19-7.24 (m, 1), 7.42 (s. 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.47 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 8.64 (s, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 432 (M+H)+.
-
- 38A. First, 4-(4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine 73 was prepared as follows. To a suspension of pyridine-4-boronic acid (2.59 g, 21.1 mmol) in 1-propanol (60 mL) was added 5-bromo-2-fluorobenzotrifluoride (5.12 g, 21.1 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (0.160 g, 0.610 mmol), followed by sodium carbonate in water (2.0 M, 12 mL). The mixture was purged with nitrogen gas for 10 minutes. To it was added palladium(II) acetate (0.044 g, 0.196 mmol) and it was then heated under reflux for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (200 mL) and water (200 mL). The organic layer was separated, washed with brine (3×200 mL), dried over MgSO4, then filtered. After evaporating the solvent, the crude material was loaded to a silica gel column, eluting with 60% ethyl acetate in hexane to give a white solid 73 (2.73 g, 54%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 7.34-7.42 (m, 1H), 7.61-7.65 (m, 2H), 7.80-7.93 (m, 2H), 8.73-8.84 (m, 2H); MS (DCI) m/z 242, 243 (M+H)+.
- 38B. Then, 4-(4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine-1-oxide 74 was prepared as follows. To a solution of compound 73 (2.49 g, 10.3 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was added methyltrioxorhenium(VII) (0.128 g, 0.515 mmol), followed by hydrogen peroxide in water (30%, 5.15 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. Manganese (IV) oxide (0.050 g) was added. The mixture was stirred for another 30 minutes. The organic layer was separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with more dichloromethane (2×10 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (3×30 mL), dried over MgSO4 and filtered. After evaporating the solvent, the crude material was loaded to a silica gel column, eluting with 10% methanol in ethyl acetate to give a white solid 74 (2.51g, 94%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 7.35 (t, J=9.3 Hz, 1H), 7.49 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.74-7.82 (m, 2H), 8.30 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 2H); MS (DCI) m/z 258, 259 (M+H)+.
- 38C. Then, 4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine-1-oxide 75 was prepared as follows. A solution of compound 74 (2.51g, 9.76 mmol) in dimethylacetamide (100 mL) was purged with nitrogen gas for 10 minutes. To it was added cesium carbonate (3.80 g, 11.7 mmol), followed by 2-isopropylthiophenol (4.90 mL, 29.3 mmol). The reaction was heated at 100° C. for 16 hours. The mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (200 mL) and water (200 mL). The organic layer was separated, washed with brine (5×200 mL), dried over MgSO4 and then filtered. After evaporating the solvent, the crude material was loaded to a silica gel column, eluting with 10% methanol in ethyl acetate to give a white solid 75 (3.19 g 84%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 3.51 (heptaplet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.22-7.28 (m, 1H), 7.44-7.51 (m, 6H), 7.84 (d, J=2.1 Hz, 1H), 8.24 (d, J=7.4 Hz, 2H); MS (DCI) m/z 390 (M+H)+.
- 38D. Then, 2-chloro-4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine 76 was prepared as follows. Compound 75 (3.19 g, 8.19 mmol) was treated with POCl3 (50 mL) at 100° C. for 10 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated on a rotovap, and the residue was treated with crushed ice (20 g). Water (100 mL) was added, the aqueous solution was then extracted with ethyl acetate (2×100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (3×100 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by chromatography to give the title compound 76 as a brown oil (2.74 g, 82%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 3.51 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.28 (m, 1H), 7.37 (dd, J=1.7 Hz, 5.1 Hz, 1H), 7.45-7.52 (m, 5H), 7.87 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.43 (d, J=5.4 Hz, 1H). MS (DCI) m/z 408, 409, 410 (M+H)+.
- 38E. To a solution of compound 76 (0.024 g, 0.0588 mmol) in DMSO (0.50 mL) was added 3-hydroxylpyrrolidine (0.0256 g, 0.294 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 140° C. for 16 hours. It was then cooled down to room temperature. Methanol was added to the reaction mixture and then purified by preparative HPLC to give a yellow solid 72 (0.0256 g, 95%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.20 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.14-2.22 (m, 1H), 2.25-2.32 (m, 1H), 2.65 (s, 1H), 3.50 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.75-3.83 (m, 2H), 3.86-3.94 (m, 2H), 4.73 (s, 1H), 6.78 (s, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.45-7.52 (m, 4H), 7.85 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.10 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) In/z 459 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (R)-2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 77 was obtained (0.0216 g, 78%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.20 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.06-2.11 (m, 2H), 2.15-2.21 (m, 2H), 3.47-3.53 (m, 2H), 3.64-3.69 (m, 1H), 3.71-3.76 (m, 2H), 4.63 (s, 1H), 6.79 (s, 1H), 6.89-6.93 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.85 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 8.10 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 473 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-hydroxypiperidine. A yellow solid 78 was obtained (0.0255 g, 92%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.20 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.77-1.85 (m, 2H), 2.02-2.09 (m, 2H), 3.49 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.68-3.74 (m, 2H), 3.99-4.06 (m, 2H), 4.12-4.16 (m, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.93 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.98 (s, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.19 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 473 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-formylpiperazine. A yellow solid 79 was obtained (0.0073 g, 26%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 3.50 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.62-3.66 (m, 2H), 3.69-3.73 (m, 2H), 3.75-3.78 (m, 2H), 3.89-3.93 (m, 2H), 6.92 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 7.03 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.85 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 8.29 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 486 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (D)-proline. A yellow solid 80 was obtained (0.0232 g, 81%). 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.13-2.34 (m, 4H), 2.47-2.53 (br, 1H), 3.50 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.61 (br. 1H), 3.85 (br, 1H), 4.95 (br, 1H), 6.81 (s, 1H), 6.88-6.94 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.03 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 487 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-hydroxymethylpiperidine. A yellow solid 81 was obtained (0.0252 g, 88%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.41-1.50 (m, 2H), 1.86-1.94 (m, 1H), 1.99 (d, J=13.6 Hz, 2H), 3.27 (t, J=11.7 Hz, 2H), 3.50 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.57 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 4.36 (d, J=13.2 Hz, 2H), 6.85-6.94 (m, 2H), 6.97 (s, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 487 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (3R)-(+)-3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 82 was obtained (0.0243 g, 83%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.97 (s, 3H), 2.22-2.28 (m, 1H), 2.31-2.37 (m, 1H), 3.50 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.72-3.80 (m, 2H), 3.81-3.86 ( m, 1H), 3.91-3.99 (m, 1H), 4.61-4.66 (m, 1H), 6.78 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.93 (d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.86 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.06 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 500 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 83 was obtained (0.019 g, 65%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.99 (s, 3H), 2.22-2.29 (m, 1H), 2.33-2.40 (m, 1H), 3.49 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1), 3.73-3.81 (m, 2H), 3.82-3.87 ( m, 1H), 3.96-4.04 (m, 1H), 4.62-4.67 (m, 1H), 6.78 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.26-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.03 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 500 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-acetylpiperazine. A yellow solid 84 was obtained (0.0033 g, 11%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.17 (s, 3H), 3.50 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.68-3.72 (m, 2H), 3.73-3.77 ( m, 2H), 3.83-3.89 (m, 2H), 3.96-4.00 (m, 2H), 6.91 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (s, 1H), 7.02 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.86 (d, J=1.4 Hz, 1H), 8.28 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 500 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotamide. A yellow solid 85 was obtained (0.0194 g, 66%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8Hz, 6H), 1.89-1.99 (m, 2H), 2.07-2.13 (m, 2H), 2.58-2.65 (m, 1H), 3.41 (t, J=11.4 Hz, 2H), 3.50 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.28 (d, J=13.2 Hz, 2H), 5.65 (s, 1H), 6.06 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 6.99 (s, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.44-7.52 (m, 4H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.18 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 500 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotic acid. A yellow solid 86 was obtained (0.0112 g 38%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.90-1.99 (m, 2H), 2.09-2.16 (m, 2H), 2.70-2.77 (m, 1H), 3.43-3.53 (m, 3H), 4.11-4.17 (m, 2H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.99 (s, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.84 (d, J=1.1 Hz, 1H), 8.17 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 501 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxyprrolidine with nipecotic acid. A yellow solid 87 was obtained (0.0229 g, 78%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.65-1.74 (m, 1H), 1.89-1.96 (m, 1H), 2.05-2.10 (m, 2H), 2.83-2.89 (m, 1H), 3.49 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.56-3.63 (m, 1H), 3.78-3.88 (m, 2H), 4.13-4.18 (m, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.07 (s, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.26 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 501 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-(1′-hydroxyethyl)piperidine. A yellow solid 88 was obtained (0.0245 g, 83%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.34-1.44 (m, 1H),1.57 (q, J=6.2 Hz, 2H), 1.84-1.93 (m, 1H), 1.97 (s, 1H), 2.00 (s, 1H), 3.25 (t, J=12.5 Hz, 2H), 3.50 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.74 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H), 4.32 (s, 1H), 4.34 (s, 1H), 6.88-6.95 (m, 2H), 6.96 (s, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) n/z 501 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with cis-4-hydroxy-D-proline. A yellow solid 89 was obtained (0.0187 g, 63%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.30-2.37 (m, 1H), 2.61 (d, J=13.5 Hz, 1H), 3.49 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.69-3.77 (m, 1H), 3.86-3.94 (m, 1H), 4.65 (s, 1H), 4.76-4.84 (m, 1H), 6.88 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.96 (d, J=6.3 Hz 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 503 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with trans-4-hydroxy-L-proline. A yellow solid 90 was obtained (0.0288 g, 97%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J-6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.44-2.50 (m, 1H), 2.65-2.67 (m, 1H), 3.49 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.68-3.74 (m, 1H). 3.87-3.93 (m, 1H), 4.65-4.70 (m, 1H), 4.92-4.98 (m, 1H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 6.89 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=1.7 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 7.94-7.99 (br m, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 503 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-(N-acetyl-N-methylamino)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 91 was obtained (0.0265 g, 88%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.15 (s, 3H), 2.24-2.39 (m, 2H), 3.01 ( s, 3H), 3.49 (heptet, J=6.8 H), 3.63-3.78 (m, 2H), 3.91-4.06 (m, 2H), 5.18-5.26 (m, 1H), 6.76 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.97 (d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 8.18 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 514 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (±)-cis-4-hydroxynipecotic acid. A yellow solid 92 was obtained (0.0087 g, 29%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.73-1.82 (m, 1H), 2.02-2.08 (m, 1H), 2.96-3.01 (m, 1H), 3.49 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.84 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 2H), 4.00 (t, J=12.6 Hz, 1H), 4.33 (d, J=12.4 Hz, 1H), 4.46 (s, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (s, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m,4H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 8.41 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 517 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)piperazine. A yellow solid 93 was obtained (0.027 g, 85%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.19 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 2.43-2.50(m, 6H), 2.86 (s, 6H), 3.22-3.30 (m, 4H), 3.36-3.40 (m, 2H), 3.51 (heptet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.08-4.12 (m, 2H), 6.83-6.94 (m, 2H), 7.01 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 4H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 8.23 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 543 (M+H)+.
-
- 56A. First, 4-(4-(2-methoxy-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine 1-oxide 95 was prepared as follows. The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38C, substituting 2-isopropylthiophenol with 2-methoxythiophenol. A white solid 95 was obtained (1.02 g, 77%). 1H-NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 3.79 (s, 3H), 7.04 (t, J=1.1 Hz, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (dd, J=0.8 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (dd, J=0.9 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.49 (dt, J=1.7 Hz, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (dt, J=2.1Hz, 7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.91 (dd, J=2.1 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 8.10 (d, J=2.1 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (dt, J=2.0 Hz, 7.2 Hz, 2H). MS (APCI) m/z 378 (M+H)+.
- 56B. Then 2-chloro-4-(4-(2-methoxy-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine 96 was prepared as follows. The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38D, substituting compound 75 with compound 95 (0.900g, 2.38 mmol). A yellow oil 96 was obtained (0.70 g, 74%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 3.83 (s, 3H), 6.98-7.03 (m, 2H), 7.09 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.39(dd, J=1.7 Hz, 5.1 Hz, 1H), 7.41-7.46 (m, 2H), 7.49-7.53 (m, 2H), 7.87 (d, J=2.1 Hz, 1H), 8.43 (d, J=4.7 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI m/z 396) (M+H)+.
- 56C. The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (R)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine. A yellow solid 94 was obtained (0.0385 g, 87%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.13-2.31 (m, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 3.88-3.95 (m, 4H), 4.74 (m, 1H), 6.79 (s, 1H), 6.92 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.01-7.07 (m, 3h), 7.45-7.53 (m, 3H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 8.14 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 447 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (R)-2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 97 was obtained (0.0233 g, 51%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.05-2.11 (m, 2H), 2.14-2.21 (m, 2H), 3.50 (q, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 3.62-3.76 (m, 3H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.59-4.65 (m, 1H), 6.79 (s, 1H), 6.92 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.01-7.07 (m, 3H), 7.45-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.12 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 461 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-hydroxypiperidine. A yellow solid 98 was obtained (0.0299 g, 66%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.76-1.84 (m, 2H), 2.02-2.10 (m, 2H), 3.69-3.76 (m, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.01-4.07 (m, 2H), 4.12-4.17 (m, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.99 (s, 1H), 7.01-7.07 (m, 3H), 7.46-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.23 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), MS (APCI) m/z 461 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-formylpiperazine. A yellow solid 99 was obtained (0.0159 g, 34%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 3.62-3.65 (m, 2H), 3.68-3.72 (m, 2H), 3.75-3.78 (m, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 3.86-3.89 (m, 2H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 7.02 (m, 3H), 7.08 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.46-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.86 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 8.30 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 474 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (D)-proline. A yellow solid 100 was obtained (0.0366 g, 78%).
- 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.14-2.38 (m, 3H), 2.48-2.55 (m, 1H), 3.58-3.66 (m, 1H), 3.80-3.89 (m, 1H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.96-5.05 (m, 1H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 6.96 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.01-7.07 (m, 3H), 7.46-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.04 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 475 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-piperidinemethanol. A yellow solid 101 was obtained (0.0299 g, 64%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.41-1.50 (m, 2H), 1.86-1.94 (m, 1H), 1.97-2.03 (m, 2H), 3.27 (t, J=13.6 Hz, 2H), 3.57 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.38 (d, J=13.5 Hz, 2H), 6.93 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.97 (s, 1H), 7.01-7.07 (m, 3H), 7.46-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.24 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 475 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (3R)-(+)-3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 102 was obtained (0.0391 g, 81%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz, δ 2.00 (s, 3H), 2.23-2.29 (m, 1H), 2.33-2.40 (m, 1H), 3.78-3.88 (m, 3H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.00-4.07 (m, 1H), 4.62-4.67 (m, 1H), 6.78 (s, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.01-7.07 (m, 3H), 7.20 (br s, 1H), 7.46-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.06 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 488 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 103 was obtained (0.0306 g, 64%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.01 (s, 3H), 2.25-2.31 (m, 1H), 2.33-2.41 (m, 1H), 3.80-3.90 (m, 3H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.01-4.10 (m, 1H), 4.63-4.69 (m, 1H), 6.79 (s, 1H), 6.96 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.01-7.07 (m, 3H), 7.12 (br s, 1H), 7.46-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.07 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 488 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-acetylpiperazine. A yellow solid 104 was obtained (0.0197 g, 41%).1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.17 (s, 3H), 3.68-3.72 (m, 2H), 3.73-3.78 (m, 2H), 3.82-3.89 (m, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 3.94-3.99 (m, 2H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 7.00-7.05 (m, 3H), 7.07 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.45-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 8.29 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H). MS (APCI) m/z 488 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotamide. A yellow solid 105 was obtained (0.0272 g, 57%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.90-1.99 (m, 2H), 2.08-2.14 (m, 2H), 2.59-2.66 (m, 1H), 3.39-3.47 (m, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.29-4.34 (m, 2H), 5.57 (br s, 1H), 5.99 (br s, 1H), 6.97 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.99 (s, 1H), 7.00-7.05 (m, 2H), 7.06 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.46-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.20 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 488 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotic acid. A yellow solid 106 was obtained (0.0225 g, 47%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.90-1.99 (m, 2H), 2.09-2.16 (m, 2H), 2.68-2.77 (m, 1H), 3.43-3.50 (m, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.14-4.20 (m, 2H), 6.95 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 6.99-7.05 (m, 3H), 7.06 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.45-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.20 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 489 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with nipecotic acid. A yellow solid 107 was obtained (0.0283 g, 59%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ0 1.64-1.74 (m, 1H), 1.90-1.98 (m, 1H), 2.06-2.12 (m, 2H), 2.84-2.92 (m, 1H), 3.52-3.59 (m, 1H), 3.72-3.93 (m, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.22-4.27 (m, 1H), 6.96 (d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H), 7.00-7.08 (m, 4H), 7.45-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.31 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 489 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-(2′-hydroxyethyl)piperidine. A yellow solid 108 was obtained (0.0308 g, 64%). 1H-NMR (CDC1 3, 400 MHz) δ 1.34-1.43 (m, 2H), 1.58 (q, J=6.6 Hz, 2H), 1.84-1.93 (m, 1H), 1.96-2.02 (m, 2H), 3.21-3.29 (m, 2H), 3.74 (t, J=6.2 Hz, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.33-4.39 (m, 2H), 6.91 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.96 (s, 1H), 7.00-7.07 (m, 3H), 7.45-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.24 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 489 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-(N-acetyl-N-methylamino)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 111 was obtained (0.0211 g, 43%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.15 (s,3H), 2.22-2.30 (m, 1H), 2.31-2.39 (m, 1H), 3.00 (s, 3H), 3.62-3.69 (m, 1H), 3.71-3.78 (m, 1H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 3.90-3.96 (m, 1H), 3.98-4.06 (m, 1H), 5.20-5.28 (m, 1H), 6.76 (s, 1H), 6.97 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.00-7.04 (m, 2H), 7.06 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.45-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 502 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with N-acetylhomopiperazine. A yellow solid 112 was obtained (0.0246 g, 50%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.02-2.10 (m, 2H), 2.08 (s, 3H), 3.55 (t, J=5.9 Hz, 1H), 3.59 (t, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 3.79 (t, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 3.84-3.92 (m, 3H), 4.05 (t, J=5.3 Hz, 1H), 4.15 (t, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 6.86 (s, ⅓H), 6.89 (s, ⅔H), 6.92-7.08 (m, 4H), 7.45-7.53 (m, 3H), 7.84 (s, ⅓H), 7.85 (s, ⅔H), 8.26-8.30 (m, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 502 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with I-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)piperazine. A yellow solid 113 was obtained (0.0414 g, 79%). 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.20-2.50 (br, 6H), 2.42-2.50 (m, 2H), 2.86 (s, 6H), 3.21-3.28 (m, 2H), 3.32-3.38 (br, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.05-4.10 (br, 2H), 6.88 (s, 1H), 6.99-7.06 (m, 3H), 7.10 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.43-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.25 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 531 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-propylpiperazine. A yellow solid 114 was obtained (0.033 g, 69%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.03 (t, J=7.3Hz, 3H), 1.83-1.92 (m, 2H), 2.65-3.10 (br, 8H), 2.98-3.04 (m, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 6.89 (s, 1H), 6.99-7.06 (m, 3H), 7.09 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.43-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.26 (d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 488 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 96 (0.039 g, 0.0985 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-hydroxymethyl piperidine. A yellow solid 115 was obtained (0.0279 g, 60%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.32-1.42 (m, 1H), 1.63-1.74 (m, 1H), 1.86-1.95 (m, 2H), 2.04-2.14 (m, 1H), 3.18-3.25 (m, 1H), 3.33-3.39 (m, 1H), 3.47-3.52 (m, 1H), 3.71 (dd, J=4.0 Hz, 11.0 Hz, 1H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.02-4.07 (m, 1H), 4.48-4.53 (m, 1H), 6.93 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.00-7.08 (m, 4H), 7.45-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.35 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 475 (M+H)+.
-
- 76A. First, 4-(4-(2,3-dihydro-benzo(1,4)dioxin-6-ylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine 1-oxide 117 was synthesized according to the following procedure.
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38C, substituting 2-isopropylthiophenol with 3,4-ethylenedioxythiophenol (0.671 g, 3.99 mmol). A white solid 117 was obtained (1.39 g, 90%). 1H-NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 4.27-4.34 (m, 4H), 7.01-7.08 (m, 3H), 7.12 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 7.93 (dd, J=2.2 Hz, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.09 ( d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 8.27 (d, J=7.4 Hz, 2H); MS (APCI) m/z 406 (M+H)+.
- 76B. Then, 2-chloro-(4-(4-(2,3-dihydro-benzo(1,4)dioxin-6-ylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridine 118 was synthesized according to the following procedure.
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38D, substituting compound 75 with compound 117 (1.37 g, 3.38 mmol). A yellow oil 118 was obtained (0.87 g, 60%). 1H-NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) 6 4.28-4.35 (m, 4H), 7.03-7.13 (m, 4H), 7.80 (dd, J=1.4 Hz, 5.2 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=1.2 Hz, 1H), 7.99 (dd, J=1.8 Hz, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.16 ( d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 8.47 (d, J=5.2 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 424 (M+H)+.
- 76C. The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (R)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine. A yellow solid 116 was obtained (0.0353 g, 75%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.15-2.23 (m, IH), 2.25-2.31 (m, 1H), 3.78-3.84 (m, 2H), 3.87-3.95 (m, 2H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.72-4.76 (m, 1H), 6.77 (s, 1H), 6.91 (dd, J=1.1 Hz, 6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (dd, J=2.1 Hz, 8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (dd, J=1.4 Hz, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=1.1 Hz, 1H), 8.15 ( d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 475 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-hydroxypiperidine. A yellow solid 119 was obtained (0.031 g, 63%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.75-1.84 (m, 2H), 2.02-2.10 (m, 2H), 3.67-3.74 (m, 2H), 4.00-4.07 (m, 2H), 4.10-4.16 (m, 1H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.72-4.76 (m, 1H), 6.93-6.97 (m, 3H), 7.05 (dd, J=1.8 Hz, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 8.25 ( d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 489 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (R)-2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 120 was obtained (0.027 g, 55%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.06-2.11 (m, 2H), 2.16-0.21 (m, 2H), 3.46-3.53 (m, 1H), 3.63-3.76 (m, 3H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.61-4.66 (m, 1H), 6.78 (s, 1H), 6.92 (dd, J=1.4 Hz, 6.9 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (dd, J=2.2 Hz, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (dd, J=1.9 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (d, J=1.4 Hz, 1H), 8.13 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 489 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 18 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (D)-proline. A yellow solid 121 was obtained (0.035 g, 70%). MS (APCI) m/z 503 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-piperidinemethanol. A yellow solid 122 was obtained (0.0284 g, 57%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.41-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.86-1.95 (m, 1H), 1.97-2.04 (m, 2H), 3.23-3.31 (m, 2H), 3.57 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.36-4.41 (m, 2H), 6.92 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.93-6.97 (m, 2H), 7.05 (dd, J=1.8 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 8.25 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 503 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with (3R)-(+)-3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 123 was obtained (0.0397 g, 78%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.03 (s, 3H), 2.25-2.31 (m, 1H), 2.34-2.42 (m, 1H), 3.80-3.90 (m, 3H), 4.02-4.11 (m, 1H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.63-4.68 (m, 1H), 6.78 (s, 1H), 6.93-6.97 (m, 2H), 7.05 (dd, J=2.2 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.09-7.13 (m, 2H), 7.18 (brs, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 8.07 ( d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 516 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-acetamidopyrrolidine. A yellow solid 124 was obtained (0.0369 g, 72%). 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.01 (s, 3H), 2.24-2.31 (m, 1H), 2.34-2.41 (m, 1H), 3.78-3.90 (m, 3H), 4.01-4.10 (m, 1H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.62-4.68 (m, 1H), 6.78 (s, 1H), 6.93-6.97 (m, 2H), 7.05 (dd, J=2.2 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.09-7.13 (m, 2H), 7.18 (br s, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 8.07 ( d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 516 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-acetylpiperazine. A yellow solid 125 was obtained (0.010 g, 19%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.17 (s, 3H), 3.67-3.72 (m, 2H), 3.73-3.77 (m, 2H), 3.83-3.88 (m, 2H), 3.94-3.98 (m, 2H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 6.93 (s, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.02 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (dd, J=2.2 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 8.29 ( d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 516 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotamide. A yellow solid 126 was obtained (0.024 g, 47%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.90-1.99 (m, 2H), 2.08-2.14 (m, 2H), 2.58-2.65 (m, 1H), 3.38-3.45 (m, 2H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 6H), 5.55 (br s, 1H), 5.97 (br, s 1H), 6.93-6.98 (m, 3H), 7.05 (dd, J=2.0 Hz, 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 8.21 ( d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 516 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with isonipecotic acid. A yellow solid 127 was obtained (0.014 g, 28%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.89-1.98 (m, 2H), 2.08-2.15 (m, 2H), 2.68-2.76 (m, 1H), 3.40-3.48 (m, 2H), 4.13-4.20 (m, 2H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 6.91-6.98 (m, 3H), 7.04 (dd, J=1.9 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 8.20 ( d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 517 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with nipecotic acid. A yellow solid 128 was obtained (0.034 g, 66%).
- 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.64-1.74 (m, 1H), 1.92-1.99 (m, 1H), 2.06-2.13 (m, 2H), 2.88-2.95 (m, 1H), 3.50-3.57 (m, 1H), 3.68-3.74 (m, 2H), 3.90-3.96 (m, 1H), 4.28-4.36 (m, 4H), 6.94-6.98 (m, 2H), 7.03-7.07 (m, 2H), 7.09 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 8.32 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 517 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 4-(2′-hydroxyethyl)piperidine. A yellow solid 129 was obtained (0.037 g, 73%). 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.35-1.44 (m, 2H), 1.55-1.60 (m, 2H), 1.84-1.93 (m, 1H), 1.97-2.03 (m, 2H), 3.22-3.30 (m, 2H), 3.74 (t, J=6.2 Hz, 2H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.36-4.42 (m, 2H), 6.91 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.93-6.96 (m, 2H), 7.05 (dd, J=2.2 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (s, 1H), 8.24 ( d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 517 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with cis-4-hydroxy-D-proline. A yellow solid 130 was obtained (0.038 g, 74%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.34-2.42 (m, IH), 2.64-2.68 (m, 2H), 3.73-3.82 (m, 1H), 3.94-4.00 (m, 1H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.68-4.74 (m, 1H), 6.92-7.12 (m, 6H), 7.52 (br, 1H), 7.80 (s, 1H), 8.04 (br, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 519 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with trans-4-hydroxy-L-proline. A yellow solid 131 was obtained (0.017 g, 33%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.42-2.51 (m, 1H), 3.66-3.72 (m, 1H), 3.66-3.72 (m, 1H), 3.85-3.91 (m, 1H), 4.00-4.06 (m, 1H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.64-4.69 (m, 1H), 4.89-4.95 (m, 1H), 6.81 (s, 1H), 6.92-6.96 (m, 2H), 7.03 (dd, J=1.8 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.06-7.10 (m, 2H), 7.50 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.79 (s, 1H), 7.92-7.96 (m, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 519 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-(N-acetyl-N-methylamino)pyrrolidine. A yellow solid 132 was obtained (0.022 g, 42%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.15 (s, 3H), 2.20-2.29 (m, 1H), 2.32-2.40 (m, 1H), 3.00 (s, 3H), 3.62-3.70 (m, 1H), 3.71-3.78 (m, 1H), 3.90-3.96 (m, 1H), 3.98-4.06 (m, 1H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 5.21-5.29 (m, 1H), 6.74 (s, 1H), 6.93-6.97 (m, 2H), 7.05 (dd, J=2.2 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 8.23 ( d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 530 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with N-acetylhomopiperazine. A yellow solid 133 was obtained (0.021 g, 40%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.01-2.10 (m, 2H), 2.08 (s, 3H), 3.52-3.60 (m, 2H), 3.76-3.91 (m, 4H), 4.01-4.06 (m, 1H), 4.11-4.16 (m, 1H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 6.85 (s, ⅓H), 6.87 (s, ⅔H), 6.95 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.97 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (dd, J=1.4 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.11-7.14 (m, 1H), 7.50-7.56 (m, 1H), 7.81 (s, ⅓H), 7.82 (s, ⅔H), 8.26-8.30 (m, 1H);MS (APCI) m/z 530 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)piperazine. A yellow solid 134 was obtained (0.0401 g, 73%). MS (APCI) m/z 559 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-propylpiperazine. A yellow solid 135 was obtained (0.033 g, 64%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.03 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H), 1.84-1.92 (m, 2H), 2.30-2.52 (br, 8H), 2.98-3.03 (m, 2H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 6.87 (s, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=8.1Hz, 1H), 7.01 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (dd, J=2.2 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (d, J 8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 8.26 ( d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 516 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-allylpiperazine. A yellow solid 136 was obtained (0.037 g, 73%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.10-2.55 (br m, 6H), 3.24-3.45 (br m, 2H), 3.7 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 4.06-4.20 (br, 2H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 5.54 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 5.61 (d, J=10.2 Hz, 1H), 6.06 (m, 1H), 6.88 (s, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.02-7.06 (m, 2H), 7.09 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 8.26 ( d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 514 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 1-(2′-hydroxyethyl)piperazine. A yellow solid 137 was obtained (0.034 g, 67%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 2.65-3.20 (br m, 4H), 3.24 (br m, 2H), 3.42-3.54 (m, 2H), 4.06 (br m, 2H), 4.05-4.18 (br m, 2H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 6.88 (s, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.02-7.06 (m, 2H), 7.09 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 8.25 ( d, J=5.9 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 518 (M+H)+.
-
- The title compound was prepared according to the procedures of Example 38E, substituting compound 76 with compound 118 (0.033 g, 0.0779 mmol) and 3-hydroxypyrrolidine with 3-hydryoxymethylpiperidine. A yellow solid 138 was obtained (0.030 g, 60%). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.33-1.42 (m, 1H), 1.65-1.74 (m, 1H), 1.87-1.94 (m, 2H), 2.06-2.14 (m, 1H), 3.20-3.26 (m, 1H), 3.33-3.40 (m, 1H), 3.47-3.53 (m, 1H), 3.70-3.75 (m, 1H), 4.02-4.08 (m, 1H), 4.28-4.34 (m, 4H), 4.50-4.56 (m, 1H), 6.92 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 7.05 (dd, J=2.2 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 8.33 ( d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H); MS (APCI) m/z 503 (M+H)+.
- Compounds that antagonize the interaction between ICAM-1 and LFA-1 can be identified, and their activities quantitated, using both biochemical and cell-based adhesion assays. A primary biochemical assay, described below as assay 97A, was utilized to measure the ability of the present compounds to block the interaction between the integrin LFA-1 and its adhesion partner ICAM-1.
- 97A. ICAM-1/LFA-1 Biochemical Interaction Assay
- In the biochemical assay, 100 mL of anti-LFA-1 antibody (ICOS Corporation) at a concentration of 5 mg/ml in Dulbecco's phosphate-buffered saline (D-PBS) is used to coat wells of a 96-well microtiter plate overnight at 4° C. The wells are then washed twice with wash buffer (D-PBS w/o Ca++ or Mg++, 0.05% Tween 20) and blocked by addition of 200 mL of D-PBS, 5% fish skin gelatin. Recombinant LFA-1 (100 mL of 0.7 mg/ml, ICOS Corporation) in D-PBS is then added to each well. Incubation continues for 1 hour at room temperature and the wells are washed twice with wash buffer. Serial dilutions of compounds being assayed as ICAM-1/LFA-1 antagonists, prepared as 10 mM stock solutions in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), are diluted in D-PBS, 2mM MgCl2, 1% fish skin gelatin and 50 mL of each dilution added to duplicate wells. This is followed by addition of 50 mL of 0.8 mg/ml biotinylated recombinant ICAM-1/lg (ICOS Corporation) to the wells and the plates are incubated at room temperature for 1 hour. The wells are then washed twice with wash buffer and 100 mL of Europium-labeled Streptavidin (Wallac Oy) diluted 1:100 in Delfia assay buffer (Wallac Oy) are added to the wells. Incubation proceeds for 1 hour at room temperature. The wells are washed eight times with wash buffer and 100 μL of enhancement solution (Wallac Oy, cat. No. 1244-105) are added to each well. Incubation proceeds for 5 minutes with constant mixing. Time-resolved fluorimetry measurements are made using the Victor 1420 Multilabel Counter (Wallac Oy) and the percent inhibition of each candidate compound is calculated using the following equation:
where “background” refers to wells that are not coated with anti-LFA-1 antibody. - The compounds inhibit the binding of ICAM-1 to LFA-1 with an IC50 less than 20 micromolar.
- Biologically relevant activity of the compounds in this invention was confirmed using a cell-based adhesion assay, (described below as assay 97B) which measured the ability of the present compounds to block the adherence of JY-8 cells (a human EBV-transformed B cell line expressing LFA-1 on its surface) to immobilized ICAM-1.
- 97B. ICAM-1/JY-8 Cell Adhesion Assay
- For measurement of inhibitory activity in the cell-based adhesion assay, 96-well microtiter plates are coated with 70 μL of recombinant ICAM-1/lg (ICOS Corporation) at a concentration of 5 μg/mL in D-PBS w/o Ca++ or Mg++ overnight at 4° C. The wells are then washed twice with D-PBS and blocked by addition of 200 μL of D-PBS, 5% fish skin gelatin by incubation for 1 hour at room temperature. Fluorescent tagged JY-8 cells (a human EBV-transformed B cell line expressing LFA-1 on its surface; 50 μL at 2×106 cells/ml in RPMI 1640 (standard cell culture medium)/1% fetal bovine serum) are added to the wells. For fluorescent labeling of JY-8 cells, 5×106 cells washed once in RPMI 1640 are resuspended in 1 mL of RPMI 1640 containing 2 μM Calceiun AM (MolecularProbes), are incubated at 37° C. for 30 minutes and washed once with RPMI-1640/1% fetal bovine serum. Dilutions of compounds to be assayed for ICAM-1/LFA-1 antagonistic activity are prepared in RPMI-1640/1% fetal bovine serum from 10 mM tock solutions in DMSO and 50 μL are added to duplicate wells. Microtiter plates are incubated for 45 minutes at room temperature and the wells are washed gently once with RPMI-1640/1% fetal bovine serum. Fluorescent intensity is measured in a fluorescent plate reader with an excitation wavelength at 485 nM and an emission wavelength at 530 nM. The percent inhibition of a candidate compound at a given concentration is calculated using the following equation:
and these concentration/inhibition data are used to generate dose response curves, from which IC50 values are derived. - The ability of the compounds of this invention to treat arthritis can be demonstrated in a murine collagen-induced arthritis model according to the method of Kakimoto, et al., Cell Immunol 142: 326-337, 1992, in a rat collagen-induced arthritis model according to the method of Knoerzer, et al., Toxicol Pathol 25:13-19, 1997, in a rat adjuvant arthritis model according to the method of Halloran, et al., Arthitis Rheum 39: 810-819, 1996, in a rat streptococcal cell wall-induced arthritis model according to the method of Schimmer, et al., J Immunol 160: 1466-1477, 1998, or in a SCID-mouse human rheumatoid arthritis model according to the method of Oppenheimer-Marks et al., J Clin Invest 101: 1261-1272, 1998.
- The ability of the compounds of this invention to treat Lyme arthritis can be demonstrated according to the method of Gross et al., Science 281, 703-706, 1998.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat asthma can be demonstrated in murine allergic asthma model according to the method of Wegner et al., Science 247:456-459, 1990, or in a murine non-allergic asthma model according to the method of Bloemen et al., Am J Respir Crit Care Med 153:521-529, 1996.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat inflammatory lung injury can be demonstrated in a murine oxygen-induced lung injury model according to the method of Wegner et al., Lung 170:267-279, 1992, in a murine immune complex-induced lung injury model according to the method of Mulligan et al., J Immunol 154:1350-1363, 1995, or in a murine acid-induced lung injury model according to the method of Nagase, et al., Am J Respir Crit Care Med 154:504-510, 1996.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat inflammatory bowel disease can be demonstrated in a rabbit chemical-induced colitis model according to the method of Bennet et al., J Pharmacol Exp Ther 280:988-1000, 1997.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat autoimmune diabetes can be demonstrated in an NOD mouse model according to the method of Hasagawa et al., Int Immunol 6:831-838, 1994, or in a murine streptozotocin-induced diabetes model according to the method of Herrold et al., Cell Immunol 157:489-500, 1994.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat inflammatory liver injury can be demonstrated in a murine liver injury model according to the method of Tanaka et al., J Immunol 151:5088-5095, 1993.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat inflammatory glomerular injury can be demonstrated in a rat nephrotoxic serum nephritis model according to the method of Kawasaki, et al., J Immunol 150:1074-1083, 1993.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat radiation-induced enteritis can be demonstrated in a rat abdominal irradiation model according to the method of Panes et al., Gastroenterology 108:1761-1769, 1995.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat radiation pneumonitis can be demonstrated in a murine pulmonary irradiation model according to the method of Hallahan et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 94:6432-6437, 1997.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat reperfusion injury can be demonstrated in the isolated rat heart according to the method of Tamiya et al., Immunopharmacology 29(1): 53-63, 1995, or in the anesthetized dog according to the model of Hartman et al., Cardiovasc Res 301: 47-54, 1995.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat pulmonary reperfusion injury can be demonstrated in a rat lung allograft reperfusion injury model according to the method of DeMeester et al., Transplantation 62(10): 1477-1485, 1996, or in a rabbit pulmonary edema model according to the method of Horgan et al., Am J Physiol 261(5): H1578-H1584, 1991.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat stroke can be demonstrated in a rabbit cerebral embolism stroke model according the method of Bowes et al., Exp Neurol 119(2): 215-219, 1993, in a rat middle cerebral artery ischemia-reperfusion model according to the method of Chopp et al., Stroke 25(4): 869-875, 1994, or in a rabbit reversible spinal cord ischemia model according to the method of Clark et al., Neurosurg 75(4): 623-627, 1991.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat peripheral artery occlusion can be demonstrated in a rat skeletal muscle ischemia/reperfusion model according to the method of Gute et al., Mol Cell Biochem 179: 169-187, 1998.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat graft rejection can be demonstrated in a murine cardiac allograft rejection model according to the method of Isobe et al., Science 255: 1125-1127, 1992, in a murine thyroid gland kidney capsule model according to the method of Talento et al., Transplantation 55: 418-422, 1993, in a cynomolgus monkey renal allograft model according to the method of Cosimi et al., J Immunol 144: 4604-4612, 1990, in a rat nerve allograft model according to the method of Nakao et al., Muscle Nerve 18: 93-102, 1995, in a murine skin allograft model according to the method of Gorczynski and Wojcik, J Immunol 152: 2011-2019, 1994, in a murine corneal allograft model according to the method of He et al., Opthalmol Vis Sci 35: 3218-3225, 1994, or in a xenogeneic pancreatic islet cell transplantation model according to the method of Zeng et al., Transplantation 58:681-689, 1994.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat graft-vs.-host disease (GVHD) can be demonstrated in a murine lethal GVHD model according to the method of Harning et al., Transplantation 52:842-845, 1991.
- The ability of compounds of this invention to treat cancers can be demonstrated in a human lymphoma metastasis model (in mice) according to the method of Aoudjit et al., J Immunol 161:2333-2338, 1998.
- All references cited are hereby incorporated by reference.
- The present invention is illustrated by way of the foregoing description and examples. The foregoing description is intended as a non-limiting illustration, since many variations will become apparent to those skilled in the art in view thereof. It is intended that all such variations within the scope and spirit of the appended claims be embraced thereby.
- Changes can be made in the composition, operation and arrangement of the method of the present invention described herein without departing from the concept and scope of the invention as defined in the following claims:
Claims (80)
1. A compound of formula I
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof,
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 are each independently selected from the group of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, cyano, nitro, cycloalkyl, carboxaldehyde,
and a group of formula II defined as
and wherein at least one of R1 or R3 is an oxazole of formula II;
wherein D, B, and Y are each independently selected from —CR6═, —CR7R8—, —C(O)—, —O—, —SO2—, —S—, —N═, and —NR9—;
n is zero, with Z being replaced by a single or double bond between D and B;
R6, R7, R8 and R9, at each occurrence, are each independently selected from the of hydrogen, alkyl, carboxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylaminocarbonyl alkyl, dialkylaminocarbonylalkyl and carboxyalkyl; and
R10 and R11 are each independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl and heterocyclylamino; or
wherein R10 and R11 are taken together with N to form a three to seven membered unsubstituted heterocyclyl or a three to seven membered substituted heterocyclyl ring, substituted with at least one substituent R13, wherein R13, is independently selected from alkyl, alkylene, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkoxyalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxycarbonyl, carboxaldehyde, alkoxycarbonyl, arylalkoxycarbonyl, aminoalkyl, aminoalkanoyl, aminocarbonyl, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxamidoalkyl, cyano, tetrazolyl, alkanoyl, hydroxyalkanoyl, alkanoyloxy, alkanoylamino, alkanoyloxyalkyl, alkanoylaminoalkyl, sulfonate, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylaminocarbonyl, arylsulfonylaminocarbonyl and heterocyclylsulfonylaminocarbonyl;
A is an unsubstituted aryl group, an unsubstituted heterocyclyl group, a substituted aryl, or a heterocyclyl group substituted with at least one substituent R12, wherein R12 is independently selected from halogen, alkyl, aryl, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxyalkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aminocarbonyl, alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl) aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, carboxaldehyde, carboxaldehyde hydrazone, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxyalkoxy, hydroxyalkylaminocarbonyl, cyano, amino, heterocyclylalkylamino, carboxythioalkoxy, carboxycycloalkoxy, thioalkoxy, carboxyalkylamino, trans-cinnamyl and heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl; and
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12 and R13 are unsubstituted or substituted with at least one electron donating or electron withdrawing group;
wherein the heterocyclyl is selected from 3-, 4-, 5-, 6- and 7-membered rings containing 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; the 4- and 5-membered rings have zero to two double bonds and the 6- and 7-membered rings have zero to three double bonds, the heterocyclyl being optionally substituted with alkyl, halogen, hydroxy or alkyl substituents,
further wherein the heterocyclyl optionally comprises a group chosen
from:
(i) bicyclic, tricyclic, and tetracyclic groups in which any of the above heterocyclic rings is fused to one or two rings independently selected from an aryl ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclohexane ring! a cyclopentane rings a cyclopentene ring and another monocyclic heterocyclic ring;
(ii) bridged bicyclic groups where a monocyclic heterocyclic group is bridged by alkylene group optionally selected from
and
(iii) compounds of the formula
where X* and Z* are each independently selected from —CH2—, —CH2NH—, —CH2O—, —NH—and —O—, with the proviso that at least one of X* and Z* is not —CH2—, and Y* is selected from —C(O)— and —(C(R″)2)v, where R″ is hydrogen or alkyl of one to four carbons, and v is 1-3.
4. The compound according to claim 3 wherein p is one;
R4 and R5 are hydrogen;
R12 is selected from of halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl and heterocyclyl;
R10 and R11 are taken together with N to form a three to seven membered unsubstituted heterocyclyl rings or a three to seven membered substituted heterocyclyl rings, substituted with at least one substituent R13 and wherein said substituted heterocyclyl, or unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring is selected from the group consisting of piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, and azetidine.
5. The compound according to claim 3
wherein
R10 and R11 are each independently selected from the group selected from hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl and heterocyclylamino;
p is an integer of one to five.
6. The compound according to claim 5 wherein p is one;
R10 and R11 are taken together with N to form a three to seven membered substituted heterocyclyl ring, or a three to seven membered unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring, substituted with at least one substituent R13, wherein R13 is defined as in claim 1 , and wherein said substituted heterocyclyl ring, or unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring is selected from piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, and azetidine.
7. The compound according to claim 1 , selected from 1,-{4-[4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl]-oxazol-2-yl}-piperidine, 1-(4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl]-oxazol-2-yl)piperidine, and Furan-2-ylmethyl-(4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-amine.
8. A composition comprising:
a compound according to claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
9. A method of inhibiting inflammation or suppressing immune response in a mammal comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutic amount of a compound according to claim 1 .
10. A compound according to claim 1 wherein A is
(i) an unsubstituted or substituted aryl group, substituted by at least one substituent R12, wherein R12 is defined as in claim 1 , or
(ii) an unsubstituted or substituted heterocyclyl group of the formula
wherein
R12 is defined as in claim 1;
p is an integer of one to three;
X* and Z* are each independently selected from —CH2—, —CH2NH—, —CH2O—, —NH—, and —O—, with the proviso that at least one of X* and Z* is not —CH2—; and
Y* is —(C(R″)2)v—, wherein
R″ is hydrogen or alkyl; and
v is 1, 2, or 3.
11. A compound according to claim 1 wherein A is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl group, wherein the aryl group is
(I) a mono- or a bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings, or
(ii) a mono- or a bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings,
wherein one or more than one of the aromatic rings is fused to a ring selected from cyclohexane, cyclohexene, cyclopentane, and cyclopentene.
13. A compound according to claim 1 wherein
D is CR6═ or —N═;
B is —S—, —O—, —CR6═ or —N═; and
Y is —CR 6═ or —N═.
15. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R1 or R3 is a group of formula II wherein
D is —CR 6═;
B is —O— or —S—; and
Y is —N═.
16. A compound according to claim 1 wherein
R1 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, nitro, and
R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, and nitro;
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl; and
R3 is
wherein
D is —CR6═ or —N═;
B is —S—, —O—, —CR6═ or —N═;
Y is —CR6═ or —N═; and
n is zero, with Z being replaced by a single or double bond between D and B.
17. A compound according to claim 1 wherein
R1 and R2 are each independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, and haloalkyl;
R3 is an oxazole; and
R4 and R5 are each hydrogen.
18. A compound according to claim 1 wherein
R1 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, haloalkyl, and
R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, and haloalkyl;
R4 and R5 are each hydrogen; and
R3 is
wherein
D is —CR6═ or —N═;
B is —S—, —O—, —CR 6═ or —N═;
Y is —CR6═ or —N═; and
n is zero, with Z being replaced by a single or double bond between D and B.
20. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R6 is hydrogen.
21. A compound according to claim 1 wherein
R1 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, and haloalkyl;
R2 is selected from hydrogen and halogen;
R3 is an oxazole; and
R4 and R5 are each hydrogen.
22. A compound according to claim 22 wherein
R1 is trifluoromethyl,
R2 is hydrogen, and
R3 is an oxazole.
23. A compound according to claim 21 wherein R1 and R2 are each chloro, and R3 is an oxazole.
24. A compound according to claim 1 which has an IC50 of less than 20 μM when tested in one or both of
(i) an ICAM-1/LFA-1 Biochemical Interaction Assay, or
(ii) an ICAM-1/JY-8 Cell Adhesion Assay
25. A method for ameliorating a pathology in a mammal arising from the interaction of LFA-1 with ICAM-1 or ICAM-3 comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutic amount of a compound according to claim 1 .
26. A method according to claim 25 wherein the pathology is selected from an inflammatory disease, an autoimmune disease, tumor metastasis, allograft rejection and reperfusion injury.
27. A method of inhibiting the interaction of LFA-1 with ICAM-1 or ICAM -3, comprising administering to a mammal an effective amount of a compound according to claim 1 , wherein administering to said mammal inhibits inflammation.
28. A method for treating a disease or disorder selected from arthritis, Lyme arthritis, asthma, inflammatory lung injury, inflammatory bowel disease, inflammatory liver injury, inflammatory glomerular injury, radiation-induced enteritis, radiation pneumonitis, pulmonary reperfusion injury, stroke, peripheral artery occlusion, graft rejection, and graft-vs.-host disease, comprising administering to a mammal a therapeutic amount of a compound according to claim 1 .
29. A compound of formula I
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof,
wherein R1, R2, R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, cyano, nitro, cycloalkyl, carboxaldehyde, and a group of formula II defined as
and wherein at least one of R1 or R3is a thiazole of formula 11;
D, B, and Y are each independently selected from CR6═, —CR7R8—, —C(O)—, —O—, —SO2—, —S—, —N═, and —NR9—;
n is zero, with Z being replaced by a single or double bond between D and B;
R6, R7, R8 and R9 are each independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, carboxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylaminocarbonyl alkyl, dialkylaminocarbonylalkyl and carboxyalkyl; and
R10 and R11 are each independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl and heterocyclylamino; or
R10 and R11 are taken together with N to form a three to seven membered unsubstituted heterocyclyl or a three to seven membered substituted heterocyclyl ring, substituted with at least one substituent R13, wherein R13 is independently selected from alkyl, alkylene, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkoxyalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxycarbonyl, carboxaldehyde, alkoxycarbonyl, arylalkoxycarbonyl, aminoalkyl, aminoalkanoyl, aminocarbonyl, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxamidoalkyl, cyano, tetrazolyl, alkanoyl, hydroxyalkanoyl, alkanoyloxy, alkanoylamino, alkanoyloxyalkyl, alkanoylaminoalkyl, sulfonate, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylaminocarbonyl, arylsulfonylaminocarbonyl and heterocyclylsulfonylaminocarbonyl;
A is an unsubstituted aryl group, an unsubstituted heterocyclyl group, a substituted aryl, or a heterocyclyl group substituted with at least one substituent R12, wherein R12 is independently selected from halogen, alkyl, aryl, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxyalkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aminocarbonyl, alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl) aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, carboxaldehyde, carboxaldehyde hydrazone, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxyalkoxy, hydroxyalkylaminocarbonyl, cyano, amino, heterocyclylalkylamino, carboxythioalkoxy, carboxycycloalkoxy, thioalkoxy, carboxyalkylamino, trans-cinnamyl and heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl;
and
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12 and R13 are unsubstituted or substituted with at least one electron donating or electron withdrawing group;
wherein the heterocyclyl is selected from 3-, 4-, 5-, 6- and 7-membered rings containing 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; the 4- and 5-membered rings have zero to two double bonds and the 6- and 7-membered rings have zero to three double bonds, the heterocyclyl being optionally substituted with alkyl, halogen, hydroxy or alkyl substituents,
further wherein the heterocyclyl optionally comprises a group chosen from:
(i) bicyclic, tricyclic, and tetracyclic groups in which any of the above heterocyclic rings is fused to one or two rings independently selected from an aryl ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cyclopentene ring, and another monocyclic heterocyclic ring;
(ii) bridged bicyclic groups where a monocyclic heterocyclic group is bridged by alkylene group optionally selected from
and
(iii) compounds of the formula
where X* and Z* are each independently selected from —CH2—, —CH2NH—, —CH2O—, —NH— and —O—, with the proviso that at least one of X* and Z* is not —CH2—, and Y* is selected from —C(O)— and —(C(R″)2)v—, where R″ is hydrogen or alkyl of one to four carbons, and v is 1-3.
32. The compound according to claim 31
wherein p is one;
R4 and R5 are hydrogen;
R12 is selected from halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl and heterocyclyl; and
R10 and R11 are taken together with N to form a three to seven membered unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring, or a three to seven membered substituted heterocyclyl ring, substituted with at least one substituent R13 and wherein said substituted heterocyclyl, or unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring is selected from piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, and azetidine.
33. The compound according to claim 31 wherein R10 and R11 are each independently selected from the group selected from hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl and heterocyclylamino; and
p is an integer of one to five.
34. The compound according to claim 33 wherein p is one; and
R10 and R11 are taken together with N to form a three to seven membered substituted heterocyclyl ring, or a three to seven membered unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring, substituted with at least one substituent R13, wherein R13 is defined as in claim 1 , and wherein said substituted heterocyclyl ring, or unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring is selected from piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, and azetidine.
35. The compound according to claim 29 , selected from 1-(4-(4-(2-Isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-piperazin-1-yl)ethanone, 4-(4-(2-Isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-(3-methoxy-propyl)-amine, 1-(4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-piperidine, 4-(4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-(3-morpholin-4-yl-propyl)-amine, 4-(4-(2-Isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-(2-methoxy-ethyl)-amine, 4-(4-(2-Isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethyl)-amine, 4-(4-(2-Isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-(2-piperidin-1-yl-ethyl)-amine, 1-(4-(4-(2,3-Dichloro-4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-phenyl)-piperazin-1-yl)-ethanone, and 1-(4-(2,3-Dichloro-4-(2-isopropyl-phenylsulfanyl)-phenyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-piperadine.
36. A composition comprising:
a compound according to claim 29
and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
37. A method of inhibiting inflammation or suppressing immune response in a mammal comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutic amount of a compound according to claim 29 .
38. A compound according to claim 29 wherein A is
(i) an unsubstituted or substituted aryl group, substituted by at least one substituent R12, wherein R12 is defined as in claim 29 , or
(ii) an unsubstituted or substituted heterocyclyl group of the formula
wherein
R12 is defined as in claim 29;
p is an integer of one to three;
X* and Z* are each independently selected from —CH2—, —CH2NH—, —CH2O—, —NH—, and —O—, with the proviso that at least one of X* and Z* is not —CH2—; and
Y* is —(C(R″)2)v—, wherein
R″ is hydrogen or alkyl; and
v is 1, 2, or 3.
39. The compound according to claim 29 wherein A is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl group, wherein the aryl group is
(i) a mono- or a bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings, or
(ii) a mono- or a bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings,
wherein one or more than one of the aromatic rings is fused to a ring selected from cyclohexane, cyclohexene, cyclopentane, and cyclopentene.
41. The compound according to claim 29 wherein at least one of R1, R2, R4 and R5 is a group of formula II, wherein:
D is CR6═or —N═;
B is —S—, —O—, —CR6═or —N═; and
Y is —CR6═or —N═.
43. The compound according to claim 29 wherein R1 or R3 is a group of formula II wherein
D is —CR 6═;
B is —O— or —S—; and
Y is —N═.
44. The compound according to claim 29 wherein
R1 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, nitro, and
R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, and nitro;
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl; and
R3is
wherein
D is —CR6═ or —N═;
B is —S—, —O—, —CR6═or —N═;
Y is —CR6═or —N═; and
n is zero, with Z being replaced by a single or double bond between D and B.
45. The compound according to claim 20 wherein
R1 and R2 are each independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, and haloalkyl;
R3 is a thiazole; and
R4 and R5 are each hydrogen.
46. The compound according to claim 29 wherein
R1 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, haloalkyl, and
R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, and haloalkyl; and
R4 and R5 are each hydrogen; and
R3 is
wherein
D is —CR6═or —N═,
B is —S—, —O—, —CR6═ or —N═,
Y is —CR6═ or —N═; and
n is zero, with Z being replaced by a single or double bond between D and B.
48. The compound according to claim 29 wherein R6 is hydrogen.
49. The compound according to claim 29 wherein
R1 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, and haloalkyl,
R2 is selected from hydrogen and halogen,
R3 is a thiazole, and
R4 and R5 are each hydrogen.
50. The compound according to claim 49 wherein
R1 is trifluoromethyl,
R2 is hydrogen, and
R3 is a thiazole.
51. The compound according to claim 49 wherein R1 and R2 are each chloro, and R3 is a thiazole.
52. The compound according to claim 29 which has an IC50 of less than 20 μM when tested in one or both of
(i) an ICAM-1/LFA-1 Biochemical Interaction Assay, or
(ii) an ICAM-1/JY-8 Cell Adhesion Assay
53. A method for ameliorating a pathology in a mammal arising from the interaction of LFA-1 with ICAM-1 or ICAM-3 comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutic amount of a compound according to claim 29 .
54. A method according to claim 53 wherein the pathology is selected from an inflammatory disease, an autoimmune disease, tumor metastasis, allograft rejection and reperfusion injury.
55. A method of inhibiting the interaction of LFA-1 with ICAM-1 or ICAM -3, comprising administering to a mammal an effective amount of a compound according to claim 29 , wherein administering to said mammal inhibits inflammation.
56. A method for treating a disease or disorder selected from arthritis, Lyme arthritis, asthma, inflammatory lung injury, inflammatory bowel disease, inflammatory liver injury, inflammatory glomerular injury, radiation-induced enteritis, radiation pneumonitis, pulmonary reperfusion injury, stroke, peripheral artery occlusion, graft rejection, and graft-vs.-host disease, comprising administering to a mammal a therapeutic amount of a compound according to claim 29 .
57. A compound of formula I
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof,
wherein R1, R2, R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, cyano, nitro, cycloalkyl, carboxaldehyde, and a group of formula II defined as
and wherein at least one of R1 or R3 is a group of formula II;
formula II does not define a pyrimidine, pyridine, oxazole or thiazole;
D, B, Y and Z are each independently selected from CR6═, —CR7R8—, —C(O)—, —O—, —SO2—, —S—, —N═, and —NR9—;
n is an integer of zero to three;
R6, R7, R8 and R9 are each independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, carboxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkylaminocarbonyl alkyl, dialkylaminocarbonylalkyl and carboxyalkyl; and
R10 and R11 are each independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl and heterocyclylamino; or
R10 and R11 are taken together with N to form a three to seven membered unsubstituted heterocyclyl or a three to seven membered substituted heterocyclyl ring, substituted with at least one substituent R13, wherein R13 is independently selected from alkyl, alkylene, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkoxyalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxycarbonyl, carboxaldehyde, alkoxycarbonyl, arylalkoxycarbonyl, aminoalkyl, aminoalkanoyl, aminocarbonyl, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxamidoalkyl, cyano, tetrazolyl, alkanoyl, hydroxyalkanoyl, alkanoyloxy, alkanoylamino, alkanoyloxyalkyl, alkanoylaminoalkyl, sulfonate, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylaminocarbonyl, arylsulfonylaminocarbonyl and heterocyclylsulfonylaminocarbonyl;
A is an unsubstituted aryl group, an unsubstituted heterocyclyl group, a substituted aryl, or a heterocyclyl group substituted with at least one substituent R12, wherein R12 is independently selected from halogen, alkyl, aryl, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxyalkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aminocarbonyl, alkyl(alkoxycarbonylalkyl) aminoalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, carboxaldehyde, carboxaldehyde hydrazone, carboxamido, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxyalkoxy, hydroxyalkylaminocarbonyl, cyano, amino, heterocyclylalkylamino, carboxythioalkoxy, carboxycycloalkoxy, thioalkoxy, carboxyalkylamino, trans-cinnamyl and heterocyclylalkylaminocarbonyl; and
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12 and R13 are unsubstituted or substituted with at least one electron donating or electron withdrawing group;
wherein the heterocyclyl is selected from 3-, 4-, 5-, 6- and 7-membered rings containing 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; the 4- and 5-membered rings have zero to two double bonds and the 6- and 7-membered rings have zero to three double bonds, the heterocyclyl being optionally substituted with alkyl, halogen, hydroxy or alkyl substituents,
further wherein the heterocyclyl optionally comprises a group chosen from:
(i) bicyclic, tricyclic, and tetracyclic groups in which any of the above heterocyclic rings is fused to one or two rings independently selected from an aryl ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cyclopentene ring, and another monocyclic heterocyclic ring;
(ii) bridged bicyclic groups where a monocyclic heterocyclic group is bridged by alkylene group optionally selected from
and
(iii) compounds of the formula * where X* and Z* are each independently selected from —CH2—, —CH2NH—, —CH2O—, —NH— and —O—, with the proviso that at least one of X* and Z* is not —CH2—, and Y* is selected from —C(O)— and —(C(R″)2)v—, where R″ is hydrogen or alkyl of one to four carbons, and v is 1-3.
59. A compound according to claim 58 wherein p is one;
R4 and R5 are hydrogen;
R12 is selected from halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, carboxyalkoxy, carboxyalkyl and heterocyclyl; and
R10 and R11 are taken together with N to form a three to seven membered unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring, or a three to seven membered substituted heterocyclyl ring, substituted with at least one substituent R13 and wherein said substituted heterocyclyl, or unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring is selected from piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, and azetidine.
60. The compound according to claim 57 of the structure
R1 and R2 are each independently selected from hydrogen, halogen and haloalkyl;
R10 and R11 are each independently selected from the group selected from hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl and heterocyclylamino; and
p is an integer of one to five.
61. A compound according to claim 61 wherein p is one; and
R10 and R11 are taken together with N to form a three to seven membered substituted heterocyclyl ring, or a three to seven membered unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring, substituted with at least one substituent R13, wherein R13 is defined as in claim 57 , and wherein said substituted heterocyclyl ring, or unsubstituted heterocyclyl ring is selected from piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, and azetidine.
62. A composition comprising:
the compound according to claim 57
and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
63. A method of inhibiting inflammation or suppressing immune response in a mammal comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutic amount of a compound according to claim 57 .
64. The compound according to claim 57 wherein A is
(i) an unsubstituted or substituted aryl group, substituted by at least one substituent R12, wherein R12 is defined as in claim 57 , or
(ii) an unsubstituted or substituted heterocyclyl group of the formula
wherein
R12 is defined as in claim 57;
p is an integer of one to three;
X* and Z* are each independently selected from —CH2—, —CH2NH—, —CH2O—, —NH—, and —O—, with the proviso that at least one of X* and Z* is not —CH2—; and
Y* is —(C(R″)2)v—, wherein
R″ is hydrogen or alkyl; and
v is 1, 2, or 3.
65. The compound according to claim 57 wherein A is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl group, wherein the aryl group is
(i) a mono- or a bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings, or
(ii) a mono- or a bicyclic carbocyclic ring system having one or two aromatic rings,
wherein one or more than one of the aromatic rings is fused to a ring selected from cyclohexane, cyclohexene, cyclopentane, and cyclopentene.
67. The compound according to claim 57 wherein at least one of R1, R2, R4 and R5 is a group of formula II,
wherein:
D is CR6═ or —N═;
B is —S—, —O—, —CR6═ or —N═;
Y is —CR6═ or —N═;
Z is —CR6═ or —N═;
n is zero or one; and
wherein formula II does not define a pyrimidine, pyridine, oxazole or thiazole.
68. The compound according to claim 57 wherein R1 is a group of formula 11
D is —CR6═;
B is —O— or —S—;
Y is —N═;
n is zero; and
wherein formula II does not define a pyrimidine, pyridine, oxazole or thiazole.
69. The compound according to claim 57 wherein
R1 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, nitro, and
R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, and nitro;
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from hydrogen and alkyl; and
R3 is
wherein
D is —CR6═ or —N═,
B is —S—, —O—, —CR6═ or —N═,
Y is —CR6═ or —N═,
Z is —CR6═ or —N═;
n is zero or one; and
wherein formula II does not define a pyrimidine, pyridine, oxazole or thiazole.
70. The compound according to claim 57 wherein
R1 and R2 are each independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, and haloalkyl; and
R4 and R5 are each hydrogen.
71. The compound according to claim 57 wherein
R1 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, haloalkyl, and
R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, and haloalkyl;
R4 and R5 are each hydrogen; and
R3is
wherein
D is —CR6═ or —N═;
B is —S—, —O—, —CR6═ or —N═;
Y is —CR6═ or —N═;
Z is —CR6═ or —N═;
n is zero or one; and
wherein formula II does not define a pyrimidine, pyridine, oxazole or thiazole.
72. The compound according to claim 57 wherein R6 is hydrogen.
73. The compound according to claim 57 wherein
R1 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, and haloalkyl;
R2 is selected from hydrogen and halogen; and
R4 and R5 are each hydrogen.
74. The compound according to claim 74 wherein
R1 is trifluoromethyl; and
R2 is hydrogen.
75. The compound according to claim 74 wherein R1 and R2 are each chloro.
76. The compound according to claim 57 which has an IC50 of less than 20 μM when tested in one or both of
(i) an ICAM-1/LFA-1 Biochemical Interaction Assay, or
(ii) an ICAM-1/JY-8 Cell Adhesion Assay.
77. A method for ameliorating a pathology in a mammal arising from the interaction of LFA-1 with ICAM-1 or ICAM-3 comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutic amount of a compound according to claim 57 .
78. A method according to claim 78 wherein the pathology is selected from an inflammatory disease, an autoimmune disease, tumor metastasis, allograft rejection and reperfusion injury.
79. A method of inhibiting the interaction of LFA-1 with ICAM-1 or ICAM -3, comprising administering to a mammal an effective amount of a compound according to claim 57 , wherein administering to said mammal inhibits inflammation.
80. A method for treating a disease or disorder selected from arthritis, Lyme arthritis, asthma, inflammatory lung injury, inflammatory bowel disease, inflammatory liver injury, inflammatory glomerular injury, radiation-induced enteritis, radiation pneumonitis, pulmonary reperfusion injury, stroke, peripheral artery occlusion, graft rejection, and graft-vs.-host disease, comprising administering to a mammal a therapeutic amount of a compound according to claim 57.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US11/535,772 US20070066585A1 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2006-09-27 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
Applications Claiming Priority (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US21498300P | 2000-06-29 | 2000-06-29 | |
US60671700A | 2000-06-29 | 2000-06-29 | |
US09/888,840 US6787542B2 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2001-06-25 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
US10/773,332 US7129247B2 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2004-02-09 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
US11/535,772 US20070066585A1 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2006-09-27 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/773,332 Division US7129247B2 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2004-02-09 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20070066585A1 true US20070066585A1 (en) | 2007-03-22 |
Family
ID=29552844
Family Applications (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/888,840 Expired - Fee Related US6787542B2 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2001-06-25 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
US10/773,332 Expired - Fee Related US7129247B2 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2004-02-09 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
US11/535,772 Abandoned US20070066585A1 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2006-09-27 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
Family Applications Before (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/888,840 Expired - Fee Related US6787542B2 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2001-06-25 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
US10/773,332 Expired - Fee Related US7129247B2 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2004-02-09 | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents |
Country Status (8)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (3) | US6787542B2 (en) |
EP (1) | EP1294704A1 (en) |
JP (1) | JP2004502681A (en) |
CN (1) | CN1705649A (en) |
AU (2) | AU2001268718B2 (en) |
CA (1) | CA2414461A1 (en) |
NZ (1) | NZ523445A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2002002539A1 (en) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2009054914A1 (en) | 2007-10-19 | 2009-04-30 | Sarcode Corporation | Compositions and methods for treatment of diabetic retinopathy |
US9216174B2 (en) | 2003-11-05 | 2015-12-22 | Sarcode Bioscience Inc. | Modulators of cellular adhesion |
Families Citing this family (36)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2004032861A2 (en) | 2002-10-11 | 2004-04-22 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Hexahydro-benzimidazolone compounds useful as anti-inflammatory agents |
DE10258007B4 (en) * | 2002-12-12 | 2006-02-09 | Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh | Aromatic fluoroglycoside derivatives, medicaments containing these compounds and methods for the preparation of these medicaments |
DE10258008B4 (en) * | 2002-12-12 | 2006-02-02 | Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh | Heterocyclic fluoroglycoside derivatives, medicaments containing these compounds and methods of making these medicaments |
GEP20084540B (en) | 2003-01-14 | 2008-11-25 | Arena Pharm Inc | 1,2,3-trisubstituted aryl and heteroaryl derivatives as modulators of metabolism and the prpphylaxis and treatment of disorders related thereto such as diabetes and hyperglycemia |
AR045047A1 (en) * | 2003-07-11 | 2005-10-12 | Arena Pharm Inc | ARILO AND HETEROARILO DERIVATIVES TRISUSTITUIDOS AS MODULATORS OF METABOLISM AND PROFILAXIS AND TREATMENT OF DISORDERS RELATED TO THEMSELVES |
TWI335328B (en) | 2003-07-14 | 2011-01-01 | Arena Pharm Inc | Fused-aryl and heteroaryl derivatives as modulators of metabolism and the prophylaxis and treatment of disorders related hereto |
US7566712B2 (en) | 2003-07-16 | 2009-07-28 | Neurogen Corporation | Biaryl piperazinyl-pyridine analogues |
MXPA06011827A (en) * | 2004-04-15 | 2007-01-16 | Astellas Pharma Inc | 2-aminopyridine derivative. |
CA2562075C (en) | 2004-04-20 | 2012-08-14 | Transtech Pharma, Inc. | Substituted thiazole and pyrimidine derivatives as melanocortin receptor modulators |
CA2571710A1 (en) | 2004-06-24 | 2006-11-02 | Nicholas Valiante | Small molecule immunopotentiators and assays for their detection |
MY145822A (en) | 2004-08-13 | 2012-04-30 | Neurogen Corp | Substituted biaryl piperazinyl-pyridine analogues |
TW200616634A (en) | 2004-10-01 | 2006-06-01 | Bristol Myers Squibb Co | Crystalline forms and process for preparing spiro-hydantoin compounds |
US7186727B2 (en) | 2004-12-14 | 2007-03-06 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Pyridyl-substituted spiro-hydantoin compounds and use thereof |
MY148521A (en) * | 2005-01-10 | 2013-04-30 | Arena Pharm Inc | Substituted pyridinyl and pyrimidinyl derivatives as modulators of metabolism and the treatment of disorders related thereto |
EP1881823B1 (en) | 2005-05-17 | 2014-12-03 | SARcode Bioscience Inc. | Compositions and methods for treatment of eye disorders |
US7880008B2 (en) * | 2005-05-31 | 2011-02-01 | Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Heterocycles useful as modulators of ion channels |
DE102006028862A1 (en) | 2006-06-23 | 2007-12-27 | Merck Patent Gmbh | 3-amino-imidazo [1,2-a] pyridine |
DE102007008420A1 (en) | 2007-02-21 | 2008-08-28 | Merck Patent Gmbh | benzimidazole derivatives |
DE102007048716A1 (en) | 2007-10-11 | 2009-04-23 | Merck Patent Gmbh | Imidazo [1,2-a] pyrimidine derivatives |
DE102008017590A1 (en) | 2008-04-07 | 2009-10-08 | Merck Patent Gmbh | Glucopyranosidderivate |
JP2011516607A (en) * | 2008-04-15 | 2011-05-26 | サーコード コーポレイション | Delivery of LFA-1 antagonists to the gastrointestinal system |
CN102056485A (en) * | 2008-04-15 | 2011-05-11 | 萨可德公司 | Topical LFA-1 antagonists for use in localized treatment of immune related disorders |
WO2009139817A2 (en) | 2008-04-15 | 2009-11-19 | Sarcode Corporation | Crystalline pharmaceutical and methods of preparation and use thereof |
EP2265124A4 (en) * | 2008-04-15 | 2011-12-28 | Sarcode Bioscience Inc | Aerosolized lfa-1 antagonists for use in localized treatment of immune related disorders |
EP2320738A4 (en) | 2008-08-29 | 2011-08-24 | Transtech Pharma Inc | Substituted aminothiazole derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods of use |
WO2011050175A1 (en) | 2009-10-21 | 2011-04-28 | Sarcode Corporation | Crystalline pharmaceutical and methods of preparation and use thereof |
CN103221391B (en) | 2010-01-27 | 2018-07-06 | 艾尼纳制药公司 | (R) preparation method of -2- (7- (4- cyclopenta -3- (trifluoromethyl) benzyls oxygroup) -1,2,3,4- tetrahydro cyclopentyl diene simultaneouslies [b] indol-3-yl) acetic acid and its salt |
PE20131371A1 (en) | 2010-09-22 | 2013-11-25 | Arena Pharm Inc | GPR119 RECEPTOR MODULATORS AND THE TREATMENT OF RELATED DISORDERS |
GB201017345D0 (en) | 2010-10-14 | 2010-11-24 | Proximagen Ltd | Receptor antagonists |
US8404859B2 (en) | 2011-03-16 | 2013-03-26 | Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. | Thiazole and thiophene compounds |
RU2658015C2 (en) | 2012-07-25 | 2018-06-19 | Саркоуд Байосайенс Инк. | Lymphocyte function-associated antigen-1 (lfa-1) inhibitor, methods for production and polymorph thereof |
NZ734220A (en) | 2015-01-06 | 2022-01-28 | Arena Pharm Inc | Methods of treating conditions related to the s1p1 receptor |
DK3277284T3 (en) | 2015-04-02 | 2020-10-26 | Proximagen Llc | Hitherto UNKNOWN THERAPIES AGAINST CANCER |
IL285890B (en) | 2015-06-22 | 2022-07-01 | Arena Pharm Inc | Crystalline free-plate habit of l-arginine salt of (r)-2-(7-(4-cyclopentyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrocyclo-penta[b]indol-3-yl)acetic acid |
US11534424B2 (en) | 2017-02-16 | 2022-12-27 | Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Compounds and methods for treatment of primary biliary cholangitis |
US20220398366A1 (en) * | 2019-09-30 | 2022-12-15 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Nonlinear Model Modeling Method, Device and Storage Medium |
Family Cites Families (40)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
GB1348142A (en) | 1970-05-14 | 1974-03-13 | Sandoz Ltd | Derivatives of alpha-cyanacrylic acid their production and use as stabilizers for organic materials |
DE2313721A1 (en) | 1973-03-20 | 1974-10-03 | Bayer Ag | NEW 1-PHENYL-SUBSTITUTED 1,3,5TRIAZINE, THE METHOD FOR THEIR MANUFACTURING AND THEIR USE AS A MEDICINAL PRODUCT |
JPS58146566A (en) | 1982-02-24 | 1983-09-01 | Maruko Seiyaku Kk | Pyridine derivative |
DE3689506D1 (en) | 1985-10-09 | 1994-02-17 | Shell Int Research | New acrylic acid amides. |
EP0283504A1 (en) * | 1986-09-27 | 1988-09-28 | FISONS plc | Compounds |
AT392788B (en) * | 1988-02-03 | 1991-06-10 | Fisons Plc | Novel benzimidazole compounds, process for their preparation and pharmaceutical preparations containing them |
US4973599A (en) * | 1989-03-14 | 1990-11-27 | Hoffman-La Roche Inc. | Phenylthioheterocyclic derivatives |
US5028629A (en) * | 1990-03-28 | 1991-07-02 | Eli Lilly And Company | 5-Lipoxygenase inhibitors |
GB9008123D0 (en) * | 1990-04-10 | 1990-06-06 | Lilly Industries Ltd | Pharmaceutical compounds |
US5208253A (en) | 1992-02-24 | 1993-05-04 | Warner-Lambert Company | 3-alkyloxy-, aryloxy-, or arylalkyloxy-benzo(b) thiophene-2-carboxamides as inhibitors of cell adhesion |
AU7006094A (en) * | 1993-06-30 | 1995-01-24 | Wellcome Foundation Limited, The | Anti-atherosclerotic diaryl compounds |
WO1995003286A1 (en) * | 1993-07-23 | 1995-02-02 | The Green Cross Corporation | Triazole derivative and pharmaceutical use thereof |
DE4405830C2 (en) | 1994-02-23 | 1995-11-30 | Merck Patent Gmbh | Process for the preparation of cinnamic acid derivatives |
US5883106A (en) * | 1994-10-18 | 1999-03-16 | Pfizer Inc. | 5-lipoxygenase inhibitors |
JP3802581B2 (en) * | 1995-03-01 | 2006-07-26 | 富山化学工業株式会社 | Novel biphenyl derivatives or salts thereof and anti-inflammatory agents containing them |
DE19527305A1 (en) * | 1995-07-26 | 1997-01-30 | Hoechst Ag | Substituted cinnamic acid guanidides, process for their preparation, their use as a medicament or diagnostic agent and medicament containing them |
CA2245586A1 (en) | 1996-02-06 | 1997-08-14 | Japan Tobacco Inc. | Novel compounds and pharmaceutical use thereof |
US6211215B1 (en) | 1996-07-19 | 2001-04-03 | Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. | Heterocyclic compounds, their production and use |
US5912266A (en) * | 1996-08-21 | 1999-06-15 | American Home Products Corporation | Beta2 integrin cell adhesion molecule inhibitors |
CA2265996A1 (en) | 1996-09-26 | 1998-04-02 | Roger Aki Fujimoto | Aryl-substituted acrylamides with leukotriene b4 (ltb-4) receptor antagonist activity |
US5916916A (en) | 1996-10-10 | 1999-06-29 | Eli Lilly And Company | 1-aryloxy-2-arylnaphthyl compounds, intermediates, compositions, and methods |
ID19116A (en) * | 1996-10-15 | 1998-06-18 | Nippon Catalytic Chem Ind | WATER ABSORPTION MATERIALS AND ITS PRODUCTION PROCESSES |
WO1998039303A1 (en) | 1997-03-03 | 1998-09-11 | Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Small molecules useful in the treatment of inflammatory disease |
US6630492B1 (en) | 1997-08-28 | 2003-10-07 | Novartis Ag | Lymphocyte function antigen-1 antagonists |
AU1083499A (en) | 1997-10-21 | 1999-05-10 | Pharmacia & Upjohn Company | Thiadiazoles amides useful as antiinflammatory agents |
WO1999020617A1 (en) | 1997-10-21 | 1999-04-29 | Active Biotech Ab | Antiinflammatory thiadiazolyl ureas which act as lfa-1 and mac-1 inhibitors |
WO1999038829A1 (en) * | 1998-01-28 | 1999-08-05 | Shionogi & Co., Ltd. | Novel tricyclic compound |
WO1999049856A2 (en) | 1998-03-27 | 1999-10-07 | Genentech, Inc. | Antagonists for treatment of cd11/cd18 adhesion receptor mediated disorders |
JP2000072766A (en) | 1998-08-27 | 2000-03-07 | Dai Ichi Seiyaku Co Ltd | Benzopyran derivative |
WO2000015645A1 (en) | 1998-09-11 | 2000-03-23 | Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Phosphonic ester derivatives and process for producing the same |
AU5648699A (en) | 1998-09-11 | 2000-04-03 | Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd. | Malonic diester derivatives and process for producing the same |
US6331640B1 (en) | 1998-10-13 | 2001-12-18 | Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. | Diaminopropionic acid derivatives |
US6110922A (en) * | 1998-12-29 | 2000-08-29 | Abbott Laboratories | Cell adhesion-inhibiting antiinflammatory and immune-suppressive compounds |
CO5140104A1 (en) | 1999-02-16 | 2002-03-22 | Novartis Ag | MEVINOLINE DERIVATIVES AND PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATION CONTAINING THEM |
IL145528A0 (en) | 1999-04-02 | 2002-06-30 | Icos Corp | INHIBITORS OF LFA-1 BINDING TO ICAMs AND USES THEREOF |
EP1175615A2 (en) | 1999-04-02 | 2002-01-30 | Icos Corporation | Lfa-1 regulatory binding site and uses thereof |
UA74781C2 (en) * | 1999-04-02 | 2006-02-15 | Abbott Lab | Antiinflammatory and immumosuppressive compounds inhibiting cell adhesion |
WO2001006984A2 (en) | 1999-07-21 | 2001-02-01 | Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Small molecules useful in the treatment of inflammatory disease |
US6365615B1 (en) | 1999-07-21 | 2002-04-02 | Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Small molecules useful in the treatment of inflammatory disease |
ECSP003707A (en) | 1999-10-13 | 2002-05-23 | Novartis Ag | DIAZEPANES |
-
2001
- 2001-06-22 CA CA002414461A patent/CA2414461A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2001-06-22 AU AU2001268718A patent/AU2001268718B2/en not_active Ceased
- 2001-06-22 EP EP01946705A patent/EP1294704A1/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2001-06-22 AU AU6871801A patent/AU6871801A/en active Pending
- 2001-06-22 NZ NZ523445A patent/NZ523445A/en unknown
- 2001-06-22 CN CNA018140904A patent/CN1705649A/en active Pending
- 2001-06-22 JP JP2002507794A patent/JP2004502681A/en active Pending
- 2001-06-22 WO PCT/US2001/020128 patent/WO2002002539A1/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2001-06-25 US US09/888,840 patent/US6787542B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2004
- 2004-02-09 US US10/773,332 patent/US7129247B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2006
- 2006-09-27 US US11/535,772 patent/US20070066585A1/en not_active Abandoned
Cited By (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9216174B2 (en) | 2003-11-05 | 2015-12-22 | Sarcode Bioscience Inc. | Modulators of cellular adhesion |
US9248126B2 (en) | 2003-11-05 | 2016-02-02 | Sarcode Bioscience Inc. | Modulators of cellular adhesion |
WO2009054914A1 (en) | 2007-10-19 | 2009-04-30 | Sarcode Corporation | Compositions and methods for treatment of diabetic retinopathy |
US20090155176A1 (en) * | 2007-10-19 | 2009-06-18 | Sarcode Corporation | Compositions and methods for treatment of diabetic retinopathy |
EP3167886A1 (en) | 2007-10-19 | 2017-05-17 | SARcode Bioscience Inc. | Compositions and methods for treatment of macular edema |
US10960087B2 (en) | 2007-10-19 | 2021-03-30 | Novartis Ag | Compositions and methods for treatment of diabetic retinopathy |
EP3797775A1 (en) | 2007-10-19 | 2021-03-31 | Novartis AG | Compositions and methods for treatment of diabetic retinopathy |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US6787542B2 (en) | 2004-09-07 |
NZ523445A (en) | 2004-10-29 |
US20050014746A1 (en) | 2005-01-20 |
US20020132807A1 (en) | 2002-09-19 |
AU2001268718B2 (en) | 2006-01-05 |
CN1705649A (en) | 2005-12-07 |
CA2414461A1 (en) | 2002-01-10 |
WO2002002539A1 (en) | 2002-01-10 |
US7129247B2 (en) | 2006-10-31 |
AU6871801A (en) | 2002-01-14 |
JP2004502681A (en) | 2004-01-29 |
EP1294704A1 (en) | 2003-03-26 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US6787542B2 (en) | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents | |
AU2001268718A1 (en) | Aryl phenylheterocyclyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion-inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune-suppressive agents | |
USRE39197E1 (en) | Cell adhesion-inhibiting antiinflammatory and immune-suppressive compounds | |
AU2004305079B2 (en) | 3-cycloalkylaminopyrrolidine derivatives as modulators of chemokine receptors | |
US6521619B2 (en) | Aryl phenylcyclopropyl sulfide derivatives and their use as cell adhesion inhibiting anti-inflammatory and immune suppressive agents | |
US20070259863A1 (en) | Arylphenylamino-,Arylphenylamide-, and Arylphenylether-Sulfide Derivatives | |
AU2005240846A1 (en) | 3- or 4-monosubstituted phenol and thiophenol derivatives useful as H3 ligands | |
WO2000059880A1 (en) | Cell adhesion-inhibiting antiinflammatory and immune-suppressive compounds | |
AU2757400A (en) | Sulfamato hydroxamic acid metalloprotease inhibitor | |
US6878700B1 (en) | Cell adhesion-inhibiting antiinflammatory and immune-suppressive compounds | |
US6867203B2 (en) | Cell adhesion-inhibiting antiinflammatory and immune-suppressive compounds | |
US20080234271A1 (en) | Arylphenylamino- and Arylphenylether-Sulfide Derivatives, Useful For the Treatment of Inflammatory and Immune Diseases, and Pharmaceutical Compositions Containing Them | |
AU2004202565B2 (en) | Cell adhesion-inhibiting antiinflammatory and immune-suppressive compounds |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |